Download NEW DYNA CYLINDERS
Transcript
Catalog No.BKC0007 Deutscher Akkreditierungs Rat ua ir e DIN EN ISO 9001 JIS Z 9901 Certificate:09 100 5919 pn e NEW DYNA CYLINDERS ua ir e DYNA Cylinder Highly reliable design of with ISO standards. The NEW DYNA cylinders, compact and lightweight mid-sized actuators compatible with ISO standards, offers a wide range of configurations and mounting types to meet various application requirements with a flexible manner. Moreover, the use of a new type cushion needle and floating packing etc have made the product user-friendlier. Caution Before use, always read the Safety Precautions on p. 3. Variation ●Standard cylinders ●Tandem cylinders ●Double rod cylinders ●Non-rotating double rod cylinders ●Dual stroke cylinders ●Push side stroke adjusting cylinders ●Pull side stroke adjusting cylinders ●Valpack cylinders ●End keep cylinders ●Cylinders with brake pn e ●Low hydraulic cylinders ●Non-rotating cylinders Mounting type ●Basic type ●Foot mounting type ●Axis right angled foot mounting type ●Rod side flange mounting type ●Head side flange mounting type ●Clevis mounting type with supporting bracket ●Pivot mounting type ●Trunnion type with supporting bracket ●ナックル ●Knuckles ●ジャバラ付 シリン ダ ●Cylinder with bellows Accessor y ●センサスイ ッチ ●Sensor switches 1 ua ir e compact tie-rod type body mid-sized cylinder compatible New type cushion needle Extensive variation of functions ■ The series configuration together with its combined wider functions and specifications offer the best match for various mechanical devices. ■ Using a new type of cushion needle that is completely embedded in the cylinder body offers fine adjustment leading to increased Snap ring performance. O ring Improved cushioning characteristics Cushion needle ■ Improved cushioning characteristics are gained by utilising floating packing in the cushion section. Safe self-lock mechanism ■ New release of brake cylinder range. Exhaustion of compressed air activates a brake shoes onto the piston rod there by stopping the cylinder. Air flow Spring ※Steel balls and a brake shoe are fixed in position. By operating the brake piston enables activation or release of the brake. Brake piston Long life (φ40∼φ100) Double rod cylinder (φ32∼φ125) Non-rotating double rod cylinder (φ40∼φ100) Tandem cylinder (φ40∼φ100) Dual stroke cylinder (φ40∼φ100) Push side stroke adjusting cylinder (φ40∼φ100) Pull side stroke adjusting cylinder (φ40∼φ100) Low hydraulic cylinder (φ32∼φ100) Valpack cylinder (φ40∼φ100) End keep cylinder (φ40∼φ100) Brake cylinder ef typ lan e ge Clev mo is m un oun t ing ting type typ (with e Piv supp ot o r t ing b mo rack un ets) tin Tru g nnio typ n ty e pe ( with sup por ting bra cke ts) mo ge foo t INDEX sid ad He Ro ds ide flan led ang nti s ri ght Axi Steel ball un unt mo e typ Non-rotating cylinder tm ou typ e ng Standard cylinder (φ32∼φ125) Fo o Ba sic ■Series configurations Brake shoe ting ing typ e pn e ■ By using oil-permeated sintered copper alloy for the bushing enables stable operation and longer life. Safety Precautions 3 Handling Instructions and Precautions 7 Air Flow Rate, Air Consumption and Cylinder Thrust 10 Standard Cylinders 11 Non-rotating Cylinders 19 Double Rod Cylinders 27 Non-rotating Double Rod Cylinders 33 Tandem Cylinders 39 Dual Stroke Cylinders 47 Stroke Adjusting Cylinders 53 Low Hydraulic Cylinders 63 Valpack Cylinders 71 End Keep Cylinder 79 Cylinders with Brake 83 Sensor Switches 97 Knuckles, Bellows 105 (φ40∼φ100) 2 Safety Precautions (New DYNA Cylinders) Always read these precautions carefully before use. ua ir e Before selecting and using products, please read all the Safety Precautions carefully to ensure proper product use. The Safety Precautions shown below are to help you use the product safely and correctly, and to prevent injury or damage to assets beforehand. Follow the Safety Precautions for: ISO4414 (Pneumatic fluid power—Recommendations for the application of equipment to transmission and control systems), JIS B 8370 (Pneumatic system regulations) ”“WARNING!” ” The directions are ranked according to degree of potential danger or damage: “DANGER!” “CAUTION!” ”and “ATTENTION!” ” DANGER WARNING CAUTION ATTENTION Expresses situations that can be clearly predicted as dangerous. If the noted danger is not avoided, it could result in death or serious injury. It could also result in damage or destruction of assets. Expresses situations that, while not immediately dangerous, could become dangerous. If the noted danger is not avoided, it could result in death or serious injury. It could also result in damage or destruction of assets. Expresses situations that, while not immediately dangerous, could become dangerous. If the noted danger is not avoided, it could result in light or semi-serious injury. It could also result in damage or destruction of assets. While there is little chance of injury, this content refers to points that should be observed for appropriate use of the product. ■This product was designed and manufactured as parts for use in General Industrial Machinery. ■ Before selecting the equipment and using any product, always read the Safety Precautions, the Catalog, the Instruction Manual, etc. ■ After reading the Instruction Manual, etc., always place the Manual where it can be easily available for reference to users of this product. ■ If transferring or lending the product to an another person, always attach the Instruction Manual, etc., to the product where it is easily visible, to ensure that the new user can use the product safely and properly. ■ The danger, warning, and caution items listed under these “Safety Precautions” do not cover all possible cases. Read the catalog and user’s manual carefully, and always keep safety first. DANGER pn e ● Do not use for the purposes listed below: 1. Medical equipment related to maintenance or management of human lives or bodies. 2. Mechanical devices or equipment designed for the purpose of moving or transporting people. 3. Critical safety components in mechanical devices. This product has not been planned or designed for purposes that require advanced stages of safety. It could cause injury to human life. ● Do not use in locations with or near dangerous substances such as flammable or ignitable substances. This product is not explosion prevention type. It could ignite or burst into flames. ● When attaching the product, always ensure that it is securely fixed in place. Dropping or falling the product or improper operation could result in injury. ● Persons who use a pacemaker, etc., should keep a distance of at least one meter away from the product. There is the possibility that the pacemaker will malfunction due to the strong magnet built into the product. ● Never attempt to rebuild the product. It could result in abnormal operation leading to injury, electric shock, fire, etc. ● Never attempt inappropriate disassembly or assembly of the product’s basic configurations, or of its performance or functions. It could result in injury, electric shock, fire, etc. ● Do not splash water on the product. Spraying it with water, washing it, or using it underwater could result in malfunction of the product leading to injury, electric shock, fire, etc. ● While the product is in operation, avoid touching it with your hands or otherwise approaching too close. In addition, do not make any adjustments to the interior or to the attached mechanisms (removal, etc., of shock absorber, stroke adjustment mechanism, sensor switch mounting position, piping tubes, or sealing plugs) while in operation. The actuator can move suddenly, possibly resulting in injury. ● When operating the product, always install a speed controller, and gradually loosen the needle valve from a choked state to adjust the speed increasing. Failure to make this adjustment could result in sudden blasts of air, putting lives at risk. 3 ●Do not apply loads to the piston rod that exceed its buckling or bending strength. It could reduce the product’s working life, or cause abnormal wear or damage to the rod or tube. ●Always install the piston rod axial center and load so that their movement directions are aligned. A misalignment applies excessive force on the piston rod and tube that could lead to abnormal wear or to breakage. WARNING ● Do not use this product in excess of its specification range. Such use could result in product breakdowns, function stop or damage. ● Before supplying air or electricity to the device and before starting operation, always conduct a safety check of the area of machine operation. Careless supply of air or electricity could possibly result in electric shocks, or in injury caused by contact with moving parts. ● Do not touch the terminal and the miscellaneous switches, etc., while the device is plugged in. There is the possibility of electric shock and abnormal operation. ● Do not allow the product to be thrown into fire. The product could explode and release toxic gases. ● Do not sit on the product, place your foot on it, or place other objects on it. Accidents such as falling and tripping over could result in injury. Dropping the product may damage or break the product resulting in abnormal, improper or erratic operation. ● When conducting any kind of operation for the product, such as inspection, repair, installation/removal of piping, or replacement, always turn off the air supply completely and confirm that residual pressure inside the product or in piping connected to the product is zero before proceeding. In particular, be aware that residual air will still be in the air compressor or air storage tank. The actuator could abruptly move if residual air pressure remains inside the piping, causing injury. ● Do not use the actuator for equipment whose purpose is absorbing the shocks and vibrations of mechanical devices. It could break and possibly result in injury or in damage to mechanical devices. ATTENTION ● When considering the possibility of using this product in situations or environments not specifically noted in the Catalog or user’s Manual, or in applications where safety is an important requirement, such as in an airplane facility, combustion equipment, leisure equipment, safety equipment and other places where human life or assets may be greatly affected, take adequate safety precautions such as application with enough margins or fail-safe measures for ratings and performance. Please consult KOGANEI with any questions. ● Always check the catalog and other reference materials for product wiring and piping. ● Use a protective cover, etc., to ensure that human bodies do not come into direct contact with the operating space of mechanical devices, etc. ● Do not control in a way that would cause work to fall during power failure. Set the controls so that they prevent the table or work, etc., from falling during power failure or emergency stop of the mechanical devices. ● When handling the product, wear protective gloves, safety glasses, safety boots, etc., to assure safety. ● When the product can no longer be used, or is no longer necessary, dispose of it appropriately as industrial waste. ● Pneumatic equipment can exhibit degraded performance and function over its operating life. Always conduct daily inspections of the pneumatic equipment, and confirm that all requisite system functions are satisfied, to prevent accidents from happening. ● For inquiries about the product, contact your nearest Koganei sales office or Koganei overseas division. The address and telephone number is shown on the back cover of this catalog. ua ir e ● Avoid scratching the cords for the sensor switch lead wires, etc. Letting the cords be subject to scratching, excessive bending, pulling, rolling up, or being placed under heavy objects or squeezed between two objects, may result in current leaks or defective transmission that lead to fires, electric shocks, or abnormal operation. ● Do not apply a lateral load of more than 1/20th of the cylinder thrust onto the cylinder rod bushing section. It could result in a shortened operating life, and in scratches or breakage of the rod or cylinder tube. ● Always use within the recommended load and specified speed. Use at levels exceeding the recommended loads or specified speeds could cause the piston rod or attaching plate to move suddenly, damaging the unit and causing injuries. ●Use safety circuits or system designs to prevent damage to machinery or injury to personnel when the machine shuts down due to an emergency stop or electrical power failure. ●Install relief valves, etc., to ensure that the actuator does not exceed its rated pressure when such pressure is increasing due to external forces on the actuator. Excessive pressure could lead to breakdown and damage. CAUTION pn e ● Do not use in locations under direct sunlight (ultraviolet), in locations subject to dust, salt, or iron powder, or in the media and/or the ambient atmospheres that include organic solvents, phosphoric ester-based hydraulic fluids, sulfur dioxide gas, chlorine gas and acids. These conditions could lead to functional shutdowns, sudden degraded performance, or shortened operating life in a brief period of time. For the materials used, see Major Parts and Materials. ● When mounting the product, leave room for adequate working space around it. Failure to assure adequate working space will make it more difficult to conduct daily inspections or maintenance, which could eventually lead to system shutdown or damage to the product. ●When transporting or installing heavy products, use a lift or support to firmly hold it up, or use a large number of people, and take full precautions to ensure personal safety. ● Do not bring floppy disks and magnetic media, etc., within one meter of the product. There is the possibility that the data on the floppy disks will be destroyed due to the magnetism of the magnet. ● Do not use the sensor switch in locations subject to large electrical currents or powerful magnetic fields. It could result in erratic operation. In addition, do not use magnetized materials in the mounting bracket. The magnetic force could be reduced, possibly resulting in erratic operation. ● Never use another company’s sensor switch with these products. It could possibly cause error or accidental operation. ● Do not scratch, dent, or deform the actuator by climbing on the product, using it as scaffold, or placing objects on the top of it. It could result in damaged or broken products that result in operation shutdown or degraded performance. ● When performing mounting or adjustment work, put up “now working” signs to prevent applying unintentional air or electrical power, etc. Such applying accidental inputs may cause electrical shock, or sudden activation of the actuator that could result in physical injury. OTHER ● Always observe the following items. KOGANEI cannot be responsible if these items are not properly observed. 1. When using this product in pneumatic systems, always use genuine KOGANEI parts or compatible parts (recommended parts). When conducting maintenance and repairs, always use genuine KOGANEI parts or compatible parts (recommended parts). Always observe the required methods. 2. Do not attempt inappropriate disassembly or assembly of the product relating to basic configurations, or its performance or functions. 4 Safety Precautions (Sensor Switch) Design and Selection ua ir e Warning Installation and Adjustment Warning 1.Check the specifications. As use of this equipment over the specified ranges of voltage, current, temperature, shock, etc., could result in breakdown or abnormal operation, always read the specifications carefully to ensure correct use. 2.Avoid mounting cylinders in close proximity. Mounting two or more cylinders with sensor switches in close proximity could result in erroneous operation of the sensor switch, due to magnetic field interference with the system. 3.Be cautious about sensor switch ON times for positioning detection at intermediate stroke position. Be aware that if the sensor switch is mounted at an intermediate position of the cylinder stroke for detection of the piston travel, the sensor switch actuation time may be too short when the cylinder speed is very rapid, so that the load (sequencer, etc.) may fail to activate. Maximum cylinder speed for positioning detection V 〔mm/s〕 = Sensor switch actuation range〔mm〕 Time required for activating load〔ms〕 ×1000 4.Keep wiring as short as possible In reed sensor switches, in particular, excessively long wiring (10m or more) can shorten the operating life of the sensor switch with capacitive surges. If the wiring must be lengthy, install the protection circuits for inductive or capacitive loads, as well. 5.Avoid repeated or excessive bending or pulling of lead wires. Applying repeated bending stress or tension force on the lead wire could result in wire breaks. 6.Check for leak current. 4.Two-lead wire solid state sensor switches produce leak current to pn e activate their internal circuits, and the current flows even when turned off. Check to ensure they satisfy the following formula. Input-off current of programmable controller > Leak current If the above formula cannot be satisfied, select a three-lead wire solid state sensor switch, instead. Also note that parallel connection of a total of n sensor switches will lead to n times the leak current. Caution 1.Check for sensor switch internal voltage drop. Series connection of reed sensor switches with indicator lamps or two-lead wire solid state sensor switches causes increasing internal voltage drop, and the load may fail to activate. A total of n sensor switches will lead to n times the internal voltage drop. Ensure that the system satisfies the following formula. Supply voltage – Internal voltage drop × n > Minimum operating voltage for load In relays with rated voltage of less than 24VDC, check to see whether the above formula is satisfied, even in the case of n = 1. If the above formula cannot be satisfied, select either a reed sensor switch without indicator lamp, or a three-lead wire solid state sensor switch. 2.Do not use with other companies’ cylinders. 5 The sensor switches are designed for use with Koganei cylinders. Use with other companies’ cylinders could lead to abnormal operation. 3. Never use another company’s sensor switch on these products. It could result in erroneous or runaway operation. 1.Do not apply an external magnetic force to the sensor switch while the cylinder is in operation. It could result in unintentional operation that could damage the unit or cause personal injury. Caution 1.Ensure a safe environment for the sensor cylinder mounting. Do not use sensor switches in places where a large current or magnetic fields are present. This could lead to unintentional operation. Do not use magnetic material for the mounting brackets. Magnetic force could leak out, resulting in erroneous operation. 2.Install sensor switches in the center of its operating range. Adjust the mounting position of a sensor switch so that the piston stops in the center of its operating range (the range where the sensor turns on). Operations can be unstable if mounted at the end of the operating range (at the boundary near ON and OFF). Also be aware that the operating range can vary with changes in temperature. 3.Maintain the tightening torque of sensor switches when mounting. Over-tightening beyond the allowed fastening torque may damage the mounting screws, mounting brackets, sensor switches, etc. In addition, insufficient tightening torque could cause the sensor switch position to change, resulting in operating instability. For the tightening torque, see the Instruction for Detaching and Moving of Sensor Switch on p.103. 4.Do not use sensor switch lead wires to lift a cylinder. After mounting a sensor switch to a cylinder, do not grab the lead wires to lift the cylinder. Never do this, as it could result in lead wire disconnections, and could also apply stress to the interior of the sensor switch, resulting in breakage of internal elements. 5.Do not drop switches, or bump them against others. During handling of switches, do not apply excessive shocks (294.2m/s2 {30G} or more) such as hitting, dropping, or bumping. In reed sensor switches, the contact reed can be activated unintentionally, causing it to send or break sudden signals. It can also cause changes in the contact interval that lead to changes in sensor switch sensitivity and result in erratic operation. Even if the sensor switch case is undamaged, the inner parts of the sensor switch may suffer breakdowns or cause erratic operation. Wiring Danger 1.Avoid letting moving objects near a sensor switch come into contact with it. When cylinders with sensor switches move, or when moving objects are nearby, do not let the moving objects come into contact. In particular, lead wires could become worn out or damaged, inducing operating instability in the sensor switch. In the worst case, it could result in current leaks or electrical shocks. 2. Always turn off the power supply for wiring work. Conducting wiring work while the power is on could result in electric shocks. Also, wiring errors could damage sensor switches in an instant. Turn on the power only after wiring work is complete. Warning Handling Instructions, and Precautions General Precautions ua ir e Safety Precautions (Sensor Switch) 1.Always check the Catalog, etc., to correctly conduct sensor switch wiring. Mis-wiring could result in abnormal operations. 2.Do not share the same wiring with power or high voltage lines. Avoid wiring in parallel to or shared with power or high voltage lines. The sensor switch or control circuit may suffer electric noise that results in erratic operation. 3.Avoid repeated or excessive bending or pulling of lead wires. Media 1. Use air for media. Consult us for the use of any other media. 2. Air used for the cylinder should be clean air that contains no deteriorated compressor oil, etc. Install an air filter (filtration of 40 µm or less) near the cylinder or valve to remove drain contaminants or dust. In addition, drain the air filter periodically. Piping Always thoroughly flush out (blow with compressed air) the piping before connecting it to the cylinder. Entering metal chips, sealing tape, rust, etc., generated during plumbing could cause air leaks or other malfunctions. Atmosphere Install a cover, etc., or appropriate protective devices when operating in locations near excessive water, oil, etc., or large amounts of dust. Lubrication This equipment can be used without lubrication. If lubrication is used, it must be turbine oil Class 1(ISO VG32) or its equivalent. Avoid using spindle oil or machine oil. Applying repeated bending stress or tension force on the lead wire could result in wire breaks. 4.Check polarity in the wiring In sensor switches that specify polarity (+, –, output), be sure that wiring connections are correct. The wrong polarity could result in damage to the sensor switch. pn e Caution 1. Avoid short circuiting the loads. Turning a sensor switch on while the load is short-circuited causes overcurrent, which can damage the sensor switch in an instant. Example of short-circuited load: Sensor switch’s output lead wire is directly connected to the power supply. 6 Handling Instructions and Precautions Manual override of end keep cylinder locking mechanism Assembly of mounting bracket Use mounting screws which are supplied with the bracket to assemble the mounting bracket. Use a hexagonal bar wrench to tighten the mounting screws evenly. When four screws are used, tighten diagonally from each corner. The tightening torque is shown below. Assembly and disassembly For disassembly, insert a hexagonal bar wrench to loosen the tie rod nut, and remove the cover. For assembly, screw in the tie rod nut with the hexagonal socket facing outward. Evenly tighten diagonally from each corner. The tightening torques are the values shown below. While the locking mechanism is normally released automatically through cylinder operations, it can also be released manually. For manual release, insert an M4×0.7 screw that is 30mm long from the neck into the manual override opening, thread it in about three turns into the internal lock piston, and then pull up the screw. To maintain a state of temporary release for adjustment, etc., pair the screw with a lock nut and, with the lock in a released state, tighten the lock nut against the cylinder side. Cautions: 1. It is dangerous to supply air to a connection port on a side with a locking mechanism while the cylinder has already exhausted, because the piston rod may suddenly extend (or retract). In addition, since the lock piston could scuff the piston rod, perhaps resulting in abnormal operation, always supply air to the connection port on the opposite side to ensure applying back pressure. 2. When restarting operations after air has been exhausted from the cylinder due to completion of operations or to an emergency stop, always start by supplying air to a connection port on the side without a locking mechanism. 3. Connect valve port A (NC) to a connection port on the side with a locking mechanism. Tightening torque 32・40・50 4.81N・m 63 12.0N・m 80・100 24.0N・m 125 42.2N・m ●Width across flats of hexagonal socket mm Bore size Tie rod nut Mounting bracket 32 6 4 40・50 6 63 8 80・100 10 125 12 ●φ32 4 5 6 8 pn e Head cover Use hexagon socket tie rod nut on both sides for only 32φ ∼φ125 ●φ40∼ Hexagon socket tie rod nut Head cover Hexagon socket tie rod nut Tie rod nut with knurling 7 1. For control of the DYNA end keep cylinder, we recommend the use of 2-position, 4-,5port valves. Avoid the use of 3-position valves in ABR connections (exhaust centers) or other control circuits that exhaust air from both ports. 2. Always use meter-out control for speed control. Meter-in control may result in failure of the locking mechanism to release. 3. Always set the air pressure to 0.15MPa {1.5kgf/cm2} or more. Small screw M4×0.7 (length appr. 30mm) 〈Tightening torques of mounting brackets and tie rod nuts〉 Bore size Control circuits for the end keep cylinder ua ir e Handling Cautions: 1. It is dangerous to release the lock when load (weight) is present on the piston rod because it may result in a sudden drop or cause the piston rod to extend (or retract). In this case, always supply air to a connection port on the side without the locking mechanism before releasing the locking mechanism. 2. If the locking mechanism cannot easily be released even with manual override, it could be the result of the lock piston and piston rod scuffing. In this case, supply air to a connection port on the side without the locking mechanism before releasing the locking mechanism. 3. Because water, oil, dust, etc., intruding through the manual override opening may be a cause of defective locks or other erratic operations, use a cover, etc., for protection when using in locations subject to dripping water, dripping oil, or to a large amount of dust, etc. 4. If the circuit cannot maintain exhaust pressure at 0.03MPa {0.3kgf/cm2} or less due to using a manifold valve, use individual valve for operations. ua ir e Handling Instructions and Precautions Installation and piping (cylinder with brake) Operating principle The cylinder with brake uses a mechanism that consists of steel balls contacting a slope and it receives components of a spring force, then it transmits the force via a brake shoe to apply to the piston rod. When the brake is released ●When the brake is released Brake piston Spring Brake releasing port Taper ring ●When the brake is activated Brake shoe A supply of compressed air from the brake releasing port causes the brake piston including the taper ring to retract and frees the steel balls contact from the taper ring, which releases the brake and lets the piston rod freely slide. When the brake is activated Steel ball Exhausting compressed air from the brake releasing port causes the spring to press against the brake piston, transmitting component of a spring force via the taper ring to the steel balls, which then works via the brake shoe to transmit a perpendicular force to the piston rod and to apply friction force to the brake. Precautions during installation pn e 1. In the cylinder with brake, the brake piston in the single brake type is fixed in place with two hexagon socket set screws, and in the double brake type with four such screws, with the brake set in a released state at time of delivery. When piping and installation is completed, or when performing operation checks, firstly supply air at least 0.35MPa (0.4MPa for an inner diameter of φ50) from the brake release port, and remove the set screws. Then, by exhausting off the compressed air enables to hold the piston rod. While the unit could be operated with the set screws removed, it is better for prevention of entering dust to use two set screws with nuts to fix it in place by inserting 2 or 3 ridges into the cylinder. At this time, do not tighten the set screws too excessive as it could interfere with brake piston, by re-locking it in place, or by constricting its movements. 2. Poor centering of the cylinder with brake may damage the seal or hasten wear on the brake shoe. As poor centering could also result in variation of the stopping position, use of a cylinder joint is recommended. Brake lock release screw Single brake : 2 locations Double brake: 4 locations During use, loosen the brake lock release screw, and set so that it does not bump against the brake piston. Brake piston Brake lock release screw (Hexagonal socket set screw) 8 ua ir e Handling Instructions and Precautions Installation and piping (cylinder with brake) Control circuit Electric control Pneumatic circuit If using a sequencer for control, the sequencer scan time will result in stop position errors. To improve the stopping positioning accuracy, use signals from the cylinder's sensor switch and use direct control via a TTL circuit, etc., for switching valves. 1. To ensure balance with the load, and balance with the difference in rod diameter sizes, always use a regulator with check valve. 2. Use a PAB connection 3-position solenoid valve, etc., as the cylinder operating solenoid valve (V1). 3. Mount a solenoid valve for brake (V2) as closely as possible to the cylinder, while use of a DC current solenoid valve will improve response (stopping position accuracy). Example of standard circuit (Reference) ●Horizontal mounting ●Spring lock W SP2 Regulator pressure setting D2−d2 P2= ・P1 D2 SP1 (P2) D : Cylinder bore size (mm) d : Rod diameter (mm) P1 : Supply pressure (MPa) REG SOL3 SOL1 V2 SOL2 V1 (P1) ●Vertical mounting ●Spring lock SP1 Regulator pressure setting π(D2−d2) P1−4W P2= π・D2 (P2) REG D : Cylinder bore size (mm) d : Rod diameter (mm) P1 : Supply pressure (MPa) W : Load(N) pn e SOL1 SP2 SOL2 (P1) W SOL3 ●Vertical mounting(thrust up) Regulator pressure setting π・D2・P1−4W P2= π(D2−d2) SOL3 V2 SOL1 W (P2) SP2 V1 REG (P1) ON, OFF switch sequence for solenoid (same for all mounting positions) Valve SOL2 V2 V1 SOL1 SOL2 SOL3 Intermediate stop OFF OFF OFF Forward OFF ON ON Reverse ON OFF ON Operating state SP1 9 D : Cylinder bore size (mm) d : Rod diameter (mm) P1 : Supply pressure (MPa) W : Load(N) Air Flow Rate, Air Consumption Air flow rate Air consumption for every 1mm stroke Bore size mm P+0.1013 60 πD2 -6 Q1= 4 ×L× × 0.1013 ×10 t P+0.1013 πD2 Air consumption Q2= 4 ×L×2×n 0.1013 ×10-6 Q1 Q2 D L t n p cm3/Reciprocation (ANR) Air pressure MPa 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 32 3.20 4.78 6.37 7.96 9.55 11.14 12.72 14.31 15.90 40 4.99 7.48 9.96 12.44 14.92 17.40 19.88 22.36 24.84 50 7.80 11.68 15.56 19.43 23.31 27.19 31.06 34.93 38.78 63 12.39 18.54 24.70 30.85 37.01 43.16 49.32 55.46 61.57 80 19.98 29.90 39.83 49.75 59.67 69.60 79.52 89.45 99.37 100 31.21 46.72 62.23 77.73 93.24 108.75 124.25 139.76 155.27 125 48.77 73.00 97.23 ua ir e While the air cylinder's air flow rate and air consumption can be found through the following calculation, the quick reference chart at right provides the answers more conveniently. : Necessary air flow rate for cylinder R/min(ANR) : Air consumption of cylinder R/min(ANR) : Cylinder bore mm mm : Cylinder stroke s : Time necessary that cylinder travels one stroke : Number of cylinder reciprocations per minute times/min : Pressure MPa 121.46 145.69 169.92 194.14 218.37 242.60 The figures in the table are for calculating the air flow rate and air consumption during one reciprocation of an air cylinder with stroke of 1mm. The actual air flow and consumption required can be found through the following method. ●Finding the air flow rate (for selecting F.R.L., valves, etc.) Example When operating an air cylinder with bore size of 40mm at speed of 300mm/s and under air pressure of 0.5MPa 1 14.92× ×300×10-3≒2.21R/s (ANR) 2 1 (At this time, the air flow per minute becomes 14.92× ×300×60×10-3= 2 134.28R/min (ANR)) ●Finding the air consumption Example 1. When operating an air cylinder with bore size of 40mm and stroke of 100mm, and under air pressure of 0.5MPa, for 1 reciprocation 14.92×100×10-3=1.492R/Reciprocation (ANR) Example 2. When operating an air cylinder with bore size of 40mm and stroke of 100mm, and under air pressure of 0.5MPa, for 10 reciprocations per minute 14.92×100×10×10-3=14.92R/min (ANR) Cylinder Thrust Find the required thrust for a given load and air pressure, and select the appropriate cylinder bore size. Load Since the figures in the table are calculated values, select the bore size so that the load ratio (load ratio = ) becomes 70% or less Calculation value (50% or less for high speeds). N Rod diameter mm Operation Pressure area mm2 Air pressure MPa 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Push side 804 0.1 80 0.2 61 241 322 402 482 563 643 724 804 Pull side 690 69 138 207 276 345 414 483 552 621 690 Push side 1256 126 251 377 502 628 754 879 1005 1130 1256 pn e Bore size mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 12 16 20 20 25 30 35 Pull side 1055 106 211 317 422 528 633 739 844 950 1055 Push side 1963 196 393 589 785 982 1178 1374 1570 1767 1963 Pull side 1649 165 330 495 660 825 989 1154 1319 1484 1649 Push side 3117 312 623 935 1247 1559 1870 2182 2494 2805 3117 Pull side 2803 280 561 841 1121 1402 1682 1962 2242 2523 2803 Push side 5026 503 1005 1508 2010 2513 3016 3518 4021 4523 5026 Pull side 4536 454 907 1361 1814 2268 2722 3175 3629 4082 4536 Push side 7853 785 1571 2356 3141 3927 4712 5497 6282 7068 7853 Pull side 7147 715 1429 2144 2859 3574 4288 5003 5718 6432 7147 Push side 12271 1227 2454 3681 4908 6136 7363 8590 9817 11044 12271 Pull side 11310 1131 2262 3393 4524 5655 6786 7917 9048 10179 11310 10 Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Standard Cylinders Bore size mm Item 40 32 50 63 80 100 125 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type, Trunnion type Operating pressure range MPa{kgf/cm2} Proof pressure MPa{kgf/cm2} Operating temperature range Operating speed range 0.05∼1.0 {0.5∼10.2} 1.5 {15.3} °C mm/s ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60, Heat resistant type is 5∼120 Note ) 30∼800 30∼700 Variable cushion at both ends of stroke Cushion Cushion stroke mm 16 25 20 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine Oil No.1 〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Lubrication Port size Rc 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Bore size and Stroke mm Bore Maximum potential manufacturing stroke Standard specification Non-ion specification Standard stroke sizer (Aluminum tube) Heat resistant type Steel tube specification Remarks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 , strokes of 251∼1000 are +1.5 , and +0 +0 strokes of 1001 or more are +2.0 +0 . 32 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 700 700 40 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 1000 1000 50 800 1500 1500 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. Cylinders with magnets are not available in heat resistant and steel tube specifications. 1500 1500 4. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. 63 80 800, 900, 1000 pn e 100 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 125 Order Code DDA 50×100 − Bore size × Stroke Non-ion specification Blank Standard NCU Non-ion specification − − − Tube material Blank Standard (Aluminum tube) FT Steel tube specification Not available for cylinder with magnet. ( ) Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Cylinder specification Blank Standard cylinders F Heat resistant cylinders (Not available for cylinder with magnet.) Note J Standard cylinder with bellows FJ Heat-resistant cylinder with bellows (Not available for cylinder with magnet.) NEW DYNA Cylinders Basic model ●Combinations of heat resistant, non-ion, and steel tube specifications are made to order. 11 − Note: Heat resistant type not available inφ32 and φ125. − Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V Lead wire length AC85∼115V Applicable to CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC,CS□T type CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V A : 1000mm CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V B : 3000mm CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only also accepted. ( ) Rod end mounting Mounting type Blank Without rod end mounting Blank Basic type Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) 1 Foot mounting type I With I type knuckle 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. 3 Rod side flange mounting type ●Orders for rod end mountings only are also accepted. 5 Head side flange mounting type ●For rod end mountings dimensions, see p.105. 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) 8 Pivot mounting type 11 Trunnion type 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. Inner Construction and Major Parts !2 !9 !1 e w q i !7 !0 o @0 !8 t !4 ua ir e !5 !6 y !3 r u @0 !8 Major Parts and Materials No. Parts q q Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Head cover y y Rod bushing u u Keep ring i i Piston o o Wear ring !0 !0 Magnet !1 !1 Cushion needle !2 !2 Snap ring !3 !3 Tie rod nut R !4 !4 Tie rod nut H !5 !5 Rod end nut !6 !6 Rod seal No. !7 !7 Piston seal φ32:Stainless steel, φ40∼φ125:Carbon steel for machine structural use !8 !8 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber(NBR) Carbon steel for machine structural use !9 !9 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber(NBR) Aluminum die-cast @0 @0 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber(NBR) Aluminum die-cast ― Foot bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy ― Axial right angled foot bracket Aluminum alloy ― Flange mounting bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Aluminum alloy ― Clevis mounting bracket Cast iron Plastic ― Clevis supporting bracket Cast iron Rubber magnet ― Pivot bracket Cast iron Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Trunnion bracket Cast iron Spring steel ― Trunnion supporting bracket Rolled steel for general structural use ― Knuckles Parts Materials Synthetic rubber(NBR) Cast iron Cast iron Cast ironNote Note:The I knuckle for φ125 only, is carbon steel for machine structural use Chrome-molybdenum steel Rolled steel for general structural use Synthetic rubber (NBR) Seals Parts Quantity Rod seal Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket 1★ 1★ 2 2★ 2 pn e Bore size mm Materials Aluminum alloy, and steel tube specification is high carbon steel Cushion gasket 32 DRP12 PWP32N CPF15 1.5×32 S5 40 DRP16 (DRP16F) PWP40N (PSD-40F) CPF20 (PCS20F) 1.5×40 S5 50 DRP20 (DRP20F) PWP50N (PSD-50F) CPF24 (PCS24F) 1.5×50 S6 63 DRP20 (DRP20F) PWP63N (PSD-63F) CPF24 (PCS24F) 1.5×63 S6 80 DRP25 (DRP25F) PWP80N (PSD-80F) CPF30 (PCS30F) 1.5×80 S6 100 DRP30 (DRP30F) PWP100N (PSD-100F) CPF35 (PCS35F) 1.5×100 S6 125 DRP35 PWP125N CPF45 2.0×125 S7 Remarks: 1. Items in parentheses ( ) are for heat resistant specifications. 2. Starred ★ designate items available as repair kits. Order code For standard cylinders・・・SRK-NDDA Bore size Mass Bore size mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 Basic type 0.57 (0.60) 0.65 (0.69) 1.02 (1.08) 1.36 (1.44) 2.32 (2.49) 2.94 (3.15) 4.43 (4.77) kg Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] Mass of knuckle Mass at zero stroke Foot Clevis mounting Trunnion type Additional mass for ZC□□□ Clevis Axial perpendicular Flange Pivot Trunnion Y type knuckle I type mounting mounting type typ (with supporting (with supporting each 1mm stroke CS□F foot mounting type mounting type (with pin) type knuckle (with pin) CS□T Note type bracket) mounting type bracket) 0.00218 1.09 0.87 0.69 1.22 0.76 0.77 0.71 0.68 0.16 0.22 (0.00324) (1.12) (0.90) (0.72) (1.25) (0.79) (0.80) (0.74) (0.71) 0.78 (0.82) 1.19 (1.25) 1.59 (1.67) 2.70 (2.87) 3.41 (3.62) 4.90 (5.24) 0.85 (0.89) 1.34 (1.40) 1.88 (1.96) 3.17 (3.34) 4.22 (4.43) 5.81 (6.15) 1.02 (1.06) 1.41 (1.47) 1.89 (1.97) 3.92 (4.09) 5.16 (5.37) 7.30 (7.64) 0.92 (0.96) 1.41 (1.47) 1.84 (1.92) 3.24 (3.41) 4.18 (4.39) 6.40 (6.74) 1.62 (1.66) 2.11 (2.17) 2.54 (2.62) 3.96 (4.13) 4.90 (5.11) 9.21 (9.55) Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 0.83 (0.87) 1.28 (1.34) 1.78 (1.86) 3.40 (3.57) 4.33 (4.54) 6.88 (7.22) 1.13 (1.17) 1.57 (1.63) 2.06 (2.14) 3.48 (3.65) 4.47 (4.68) 7.84 (8.18) 1.63 (1.67) 2.07 (2.13) 2.56 (2.64) 4.20 (4.37) 5.19 (5.40) 9.39 (9.73) 0.00300 (0.00431) 0.00428 (0.00635) 0.00515 (0.00773) 0.00834 (0.01302) 0.01061 (0.01642) 0.01490 (0.02311) 0.04 0.04 0.046 0.05 0.06 0.066 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 1.47 1.24 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke 1.19+(0.00428×100)=1.618kg 12 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) Stroke 2‐Rc1/ 8 Connection port 16 16 ua ir e DDA 32× 10(width across flats) 7 3 M10×1.25 25.5 25.5 2‐Cushion needle (width across flats 2.5) φ26 φ12 φ26 4×2‐M6×1 Depth 14 6 17 □33 □44 DDA Bore size × 2 19 32 15 31 31 93 +Stroke 142 +Stroke 47 2 Stroke 2‐O Connection port N N P Q W(width across flats) Q M M K P 2-Y (width across flats) φD φV φD pn e 4×2‐L J I □T □S E G B G C+Stroke A+Stroke R A B C D E F G H I J K 40 144 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M 6×1 Depth 14 50 152 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M 6×1 Depth 14 63 155 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M 8×1.25 Depth 14 Bore size L 80 185 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 185 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 125 205 89 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Code M N O P Q R S T V W Y 40 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 2 50 37 16 14 2.5 50 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 2 62 47 20 17 3 63 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 2 75 56 20 17 3 80 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 2 94 70 25 21 3 100 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 2 112 84 30 26 3 125 14 20 Rc1/2 29 20 2 136 104 35 32 3 Bore size 13 Code 2 F H Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDA Bore size × -1 Stroke A+Stroke □S B □T C+Stroke F G R G 2-O Connection port ua ir e E I H 2 N N AH AT AP2 AS AP1 φV J K View from Z W (width across flats) AF AD AG AG AB AE AD AC+Stroke AA+Stroke Z Code A B 32 142 47 40 144 49 50 152 57 63 155 57 80 185 75 100 185 75 125 205 89 Bore size Bore size Code AA 32 153 40 165 50 173 63 184 80 200 100 200 125 220 C E F G H I J K N O R S T V W 93 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 44 33 12 10 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 114 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 2 136 104 35 32 AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 26.5 134 9.5 50 33 20.5 28 9 11 50 3.2 25.5 140 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 149 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 158 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 168 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 168 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 54 184 18 136 104 35 70 18 20 138 6 Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDA Bore size × -2 Stroke A+Stroke B □S pn e FH FR FT 4‐φFP FQ FF 2 H N G N J K W (width across flats) FG FD FG FD FC+Stroke FB FA+Stroke FE Code R 2-O Connection port G φV FS I C+Stroke F E □T A B C E F G H I J K N O R S T V W 32 142 47 93 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 44 33 12 10 40 144 49 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 50 152 57 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 63 155 57 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 80 185 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 100 185 75 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 125 205 89 114 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 2 136 104 35 32 Bore size Code FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 32 119 57 73 23 81 63 14 22 9 54 14 44 8 40 119 59 73 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 123 67 73 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 130 67 76 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 9 80 150 88 82 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 158 88 82 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 125 172 106 80 46 213 175 21 69 18 144 35 137 18 Bore size 14 Dimensions of Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDA Bore size × -3 Stroke A+Stroke BE B □T BA C+Stroke R ua ir e BF BB G G 2-O Connection port N I H N φD φV BD BC J K W (width across flats) 4‐φBP Code 5 N O R T V W M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 33 12 10 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 37 16 14 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 47 20 17 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 56 20 17 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 70 25 21 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 84 30 26 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 2 104 35 32 K A B C D G H I J 32 142 47 93 26 31 19 17 6 40 144 49 93 32 31 21 22 50 152 57 93 38 31 29 27 63 155 57 96 38 32 29 27 80 185 75 108 44 36 37 100 185 75 108 50 36 125 205 89 114 60 36 Bore size Bore size Code BA 32 37 40 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 125 73 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 47 33 72 58 7 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 16 138 104 196 168 14 Dimensions of Head Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDA Bore size × -5 Stroke pn e BE BG+Stroke BF B □S C+Stroke E □T F 2 H I BB 2-O Connection port G N G N φV φD BC BD J K W (width across flats) 4‐φBP B C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 125 89 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 136 104 35 32 Code BB BC BD BE BF BG BP 32 10 47 33 72 58 150 7 40 10 52 36 84 70 152 7 50 10 65 47 104 86 160 9 63 10 76 56 116 98 163 9 80 16 95 70 143 119 199 12 100 16 115 84 162 138 199 12 125 16 138 104 196 168 219 14 Bore size 15 Code 32 Bore size Dimensions of Clevis Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDA Bore size × -7 Stroke CA+Stroke ua ir e □S CB+Stroke B 2 2-O Connection port G N PA1 □T CC G +0.7 CT CP+0.5 CT N J I (width across flats) CF 8 9/f EH φC φV φD C+Stroke F E H CJ CD K W (width across flats) Code B C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 32 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 125 89 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 136 104 35 32 Bore size Bore size Code CA 32 172 40 174 50 184 63 187 80 236 100 236 125 251 CB CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 159 19 R15 12 R17 13 16 8.5 46 161 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 169 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 172 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 235 32 R22 20 R30 16 32 16.5 78 ●With Supporting Bracket DDA Bore size × -7-7C Stroke GH GC Code GG GH 4‐φGP GF GD GJ GI GB GT pn e GA+Stroke GE GA GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GJ GP GT 32 215.5 56.5 12.5 63 85 65 40 11.5 57 35 9(Thru hole) 8 40 227.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 11(Thru hole) 8 50 235.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 11(Thru hole) 8 63 238.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 11(Thru hole) 8 80 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 14(Thru hole) 12 100 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 14(Thru hole) 12 125 349.5 114.5 29.5 117 145 110 77 20 143 75 18(Thru hole) 15 Bore size GI 16 Dimensions of Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDA Bore size × -8 ua ir e Stroke DA+Stroke DB+Stroke B E F 2 H N □T DC 2-O Connection port G □S DJ C+Stroke G DQ N J I (width across flats) DF φV φD φDEH9 DD K W (width across flats) Code B C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 32 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 125 89 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 136 104 35 32 Bore size Bore size Code DA 172 40 175 50 183 63 186 80 236 100 235 125 255 17 DQ DB DC DD DE DF DJ 159 19 R16 12 R16 13 16 161 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 169 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 172 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 215 32 R24 20 R25 21 32 215 32 R24 20 R26 20 32 235 32 R25 20 R30 20 32 pn e 32 0 - 0.070 0 - 0.084 0 - 0.084 0 - 0.084 0 - 0.100 0 - 0.100 0 - 0.100 Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -11 Stroke ua ir e DDA A+Stroke EB EG EE EG B C+Stroke R EA+ Stroke 2 □S □T E I F 2 H 2-O Connection port ET G N G N J φD φV φD EC ED φEPe9 ER K W (width across flats) Code A B 32 142 47 40 144 49 50 152 57 63 155 57 80 185 75 100 185 75 125 205 89 Bore size Bore size Code EA 32 93.5 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 125 146 C D E F G H I J K N O R S T V W 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 44 33 12 10 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 2 136 104 35 32 ET ER EB EC EE EG EP 87 53 20 55 16 16 R1 30 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 208 159 37.5 158 25 25 R2 43 ●With Supporting Bracket DDA ED Bore size × -11-11T HD HR HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 pn e HQ Stroke HF HB 4‐φHP HE Code HA HA HB HD HE HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 32 81 60 R16 85 70 66.5 40 9(Thru hole) 15 1 12 16 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 125 145 105 R30 208 183 164.5 85 18(Thru hole) 25 0 27 25 Bore size HF 18 Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Non-Rotating Cylinders Bore size mm Item 40 50 63 80 100 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type, Trunnion type Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.1∼1.0 {1.0∼10.2} MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range Operating speed range 1.5 {15.3} °C ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60.) mm/s Cushion 50∼500 Variable cushion at both ends of stroke Cushion stroke 16 mm Lubrication 20 25 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine oil Class 1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Non-rotating accuracy Allowable torque N・m {kgf・m} Port size Rc ±1° ±0.8° ±0.5° 1 {0.1} 3.4 {0.35} 10 {1.02} 1/4 3/8 1/2 Bore size and Stroke mm Bore Standard stroke sizer 40 50 63 Maximum potential manufacturing stroke 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 500 pn e 80 Remarks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 , strokes of 251∼500 are +1.5. +0 +0 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. Cylinders with magnets are not available in steel tube specifications. 4. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. 100 Order Code DDA 50× 100 − − − Bore size × Stroke Cylinder specification L Non-rotating cylinder JL Non-rotating cylinder with bellows − Lead wire length Applicable to ZC,CS□T type A : 1000mm B : 3000mm ( ) Rod end mounting Blank Without rod end mounting Types of bellows Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) I With I type knuckle JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and JK Cornex (∼200˚C) cylinder rod end. JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Orders for rod end mountings only are also accepted. ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●For rod end mountings dimensions, see p.105. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Mounting type Blank Basic type Tube material 1 Foot mounting type Blank Standard 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type (Aluminum tube) 3 Rod side flange mounting type FT Steel tube specification 5 Head side flange mounting type Not available for cylinder NEW DYNA Cylinders 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) with magnet. Basic model 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) 8 Pivot mounting type 11 Trunnion type 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. ( 19 − ) Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●Cylinders with magnets are not available in steel tube specifications. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. ua ir e Inner Construction and Major Parts !2 !9 !1 !5 !6 y @1 !3 r u @0 !8 e w q i !7 !0 o @0 !8 t !4 Major Parts and Materials Parts No. Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Head cover y y Rod bushing u u Keep ring i i Piston o o Wear ring !0 !0 Magnet !1 !1 Cushion needle !2 !2 Snap ring !3 !3 Tie rod nut R !4 !4 Tie rod nut H !5 !5 Rod end nut Parts Materials Materials No. Aluminum alloy, and steel tube specifications are high carbon steel !6 !6 Rod seal Carbon steel for machine structural use !7 !7 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Carbon steel for machine structural use !8 !8 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast !9 !9 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @0 @0 Tube gasket Aluminum alloy Spring pin Aluminum alloy @1 @1 ― Aluminum alloy ― Axial right angled foot bracket Cast iron Plastic ― Flange mounting bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Urethane rubber Synthetic rubber (NBR) Carbon steel for machine structural use Foot bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Rubber magnet ― Clevis mounting bracket Cast iron Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Clevis supporting bracket Cast iron Spring steel ― Pivot bracket Cast iron Rolled steel for general structural use ― Trunnion bracket Cast iron Chrome-molybdenum steel ― Trunnion supporting bracket Cast iron Rolled steel for general structural use ― Knuckles Cast iron pn e q q Seals Rod seal Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket 1 1 2 2 2 40 PGR14A PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 S5 50 PGR19 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S6 63 PGR19 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S6 80 PGR23 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S6 100 PGR23 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S6 Parts Quantity Bore size mm Cushion gasket Mass Bore size mm Basic type Foot mounting type 40 50 63 80 100 0.65 (0.69) 1.02 (1.08) 1.36 (1.44) 2.32 (2.49) 2.94 (3.15) 0.78 (0.82) 1.19 (1.25) 1.59 (1.67) 2.70 (2.87) 3.41 (3.62) kg Mass at zero stroke Axis right angled foot Flange mounting type mounting type 0.85 (0.89) 1.34 (1.40) 1.88 (1.96) 3.17 (3.34) 4.22 (4.43) 1.02 (1.06) 1.41 (1.47) 1.89 (1.97) 3.92 (4.09) 5.16 (5.37) mounting type Clevis mounting type Clevis (with supporting bracket) Pivot mounting type Trunnion type 0.92 (0.96) 1.41 (1.47) 1.84 (1.92) 3.24 (3.41) 4.18 (4.39) 1.62 (1.66) 2.11 (2.17) 2.54 (2.62) 3.96 (4.13) 4.90 (5.11) Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 0.83 (0.87) 1.28 (1.34) 1.78 (1.86) 3.40 (3.57) 4.33 (4.54) 1.13 (1.17) 1.57 (1.63) 2.06 (2.14) 3.48 (3.65) 4.47 (4.68) Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) 1.63 (1.67) 2.07 (2.13) 2.56 (2.64) 4.20 (4.37) 5.19 (5.40) Additional Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] mass for each ZC□□□ CS□F 1mm stroke CS□T Note 0.00276 (0.00407) 0.00425 (0.00632) 0.00512 (0.00770) 0.00810 (0.01278) 0.00869 (0.01450) 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 0.87 0.62 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke 1.19+(0.00425×100)=1.615kg 20 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) DDAL Bore size × Stroke 2-O Connection port N 2-Y (width across flats) P 4×2‐L Q Q M M ua ir e N P W1 (width across flats) φD φD K1 J1 H I1 □T 2 F E □S G G C+Stroke B R A+Stroke Bore size Code A 40 144 50 152 63 155 80 185 100 185 Bore size Code B C D E F G H I1 J1 K1 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M N O P Q R S T W1 Y Depth 14 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 2 50 37 14 2.5 Depth 14 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 2 62 47 19 3 M 8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 2 75 56 19 3 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 2 94 70 23 3 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 2 112 84 23 3 L M 6×1 50 M 6×1 63 80 100 pn e 40 21 Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAL Bore size × -1 Stroke ua ir e A+Stroke C+Stroke B □S □T E F H I1 R G 2 G N N 2-O Connection port J1 AH AT AP2 AS AP1 K1 View from Z AF AD W1 (width across flats) AE AG AG AD AC+Stroke AB AA+Stroke Z Code A B 40 144 49 50 152 57 63 155 57 80 185 75 100 185 75 Bore size Bore size Code AA 40 165 50 173 63 184 80 200 100 200 C E F G H I1 J1 K1 N O R S T W1 93 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 14 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 19 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 19 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 23 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 23 AB AC AD AE AF AG AP1 AP2 AS AT 25.5 140 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 149 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 158 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 168 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 168 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 AH Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAL Bore size × -2 Stroke pn e A+Stroke □T F E H I1 C+Stroke B □S 2 R G G N N 2-O Connection port FH FR FT FS J1 K1 4-φFP FQ W1 (width across flats) FF FD FG FG FD FC+Stroke FB FA+Stroke FE Code A B C E F G H I1 J1 K1 N O R S T W1 40 144 49 93 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 14 50 152 57 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 19 63 155 57 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 19 80 185 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 23 100 185 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 23 Bore size Code FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 40 119 59 73 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 123 67 73 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 130 67 76 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 150 88 82 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 158 88 82 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size 9 22 Dimensions of Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -3 Stroke ua ir e DDAL A+Stroke BE BF B □T BA H I1 G G N N 2-O Connection port φD BC J1 BD R C+Stroke BB K1 4-φBP Code W1 (width across flats) 5 A B C D G H I1 J1 K1 N O R T W1 40 144 49 93 32 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 2 37 14 50 152 57 93 38 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 47 19 63 155 57 96 38 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 56 19 80 185 75 108 44 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 70 23 100 185 75 108 50 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 84 23 Bore size Bore size Code BA 40 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 Dimensions of Head Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAL Bore size × -5 Stroke pn e BE BG+Stroke BF □S □T B F G 2 H I1 BB C+Stroke E G 2-O Connection port N N φD BC BD J1 K1 W1 4-φBP (width across flats) B C D E F G H I1 J1 K1 N O S T W1 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 37 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 19 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 19 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 23 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 23 Code BB BC BD BE BF BG BP 40 10 52 36 84 70 152 7 50 10 65 47 104 86 160 9 63 10 76 56 116 98 163 9 80 16 95 70 143 119 199 12 100 16 115 84 162 138 199 12 Bore size 23 Code 40 Bore size Dimensions of Clevis Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -7 Stroke ua ir e DDAL CA+Stroke CJ CB+Stroke B E F H 2 G PA1 □T G N +0.7 CT CP+0.5 CT N 2-O Connection port J1 I1 (width across flats) □S CC C+Stroke CF 8 9/f φD EH φC CD K1 W1 (width across flats) Code B C D E F G H I1 J1 K1 N O S T W1 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 37 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 19 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 19 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 23 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 23 Bore size Bore size Code CA 40 174 50 184 63 187 80 236 100 236 CB CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 161 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 169 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 172 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 Bore size × -7-7C Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDAL GA+Stroke GH GC Code GG GH GJ GT GI GB 4‐φGP GF GE GD GA GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GI GJ GP GT 40 227.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 11(Thru hole) 8 50 235.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 11(Thru hole) 8 63 238.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 11(Thru hole) 8 80 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 14(Thru hole) 12 100 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 14(Thru hole) 12 Bore size 24 Dimensions of Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -8 Stroke ua ir e DDAL DA+Stroke DJ DB+Stroke C+Stroke B E H F 2 G □T G N 2-O Connection port DQ N J1 I1 (width across flats) □S DC DF φD E φD H9 DD K1 W1 (width across flats) Code B C D E F G H I1 J1 K1 N O S T W1 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 37 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 19 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 19 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 23 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 23 Bore size Bore size Code DA 175 50 183 63 186 80 236 100 235 25 DQ DB DC DD DE DF DJ 161 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 169 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 172 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 215 32 R24 20 R25 21 32 215 32 R24 20 R26 20 32 pn e 40 0 -0.084 0 -0.084 0 -0.084 0 -0.100 0 -0.100 Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke -11 ua ir e DDAL A+Stroke EB EG EE EG C+Stroke B EA+ □S □T F E I1 H ER 2 G N R Stroke 2 ET G 2-O Connection port N φD φD EC ED φEPe9 J1 K1 W1 (width across flats) Code A B 40 144 49 50 152 57 63 155 57 80 185 75 100 185 75 Bore size Bore size Code EA 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 C D E F G H I1 J1 K1 N O R S T W1 93 32 34 15 31 21 19 7 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 19 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 19 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 23 108 50 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 23 EB EC ED EE EG EP ER ET 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 ●With Supporting Bracket DDAL Bore size × -11-11T HR HD HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 pn e HQ Stroke 4‐φHP HF HB HE Code HA HA HB HD HE HF HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size HI 26 Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Double Rod Cylinders Bore size mm Item 40 32 50 63 80 100 125 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Flange mounting type, Trunnion type Mounting type Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.1∼1.0 {1.0∼10.2} MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range Operating speed range 1.5 {15.3} °C ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60.) mm/s Cushion Cushion stroke 50∼800 50∼700 Variable cushion at both ends of stroke 16 mm 25 20 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine Oil No.1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Lubrication Port size Rc 1/4 1/8 3/8 1/2 Bore size and Stroke Bore Standard stroke sizer 32 40 50 63 80 50、75、100、150、200、250、300、350、400、450、500 600、700、800 800 50、75、100、150、200、250、300、350、400、450、500 1000 600、700、800、900、1000 pn e 100 50、75、100、150、200、250、300、350、400、450、500 mm Maximum potential manufacturing stroke 500 125 Remarks : 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 +0 , strokes of 251 ∼1000 are +1.5 +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. Order Code DDA 50× 100 − Bore size × Stroke Cylinder specification D Double rod cylinders DJ Double rod cylinders with bellows − − − Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Attached on both sides ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Mounting type Blank Basic type 1 Foot mounting type 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type 3 Flange mounting type NEW DYNA Cylinders 11 Trunnion type Basic model 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. 27 Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Lead wire length Applicable to ZC,CS□T type A : 1000mm B : 3000mm ( ) Rod end mounting Blank Without rod end mounting Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) I With I type knuckle ●Rod end mounting are included at time of delivery. If required for both sides, place separate orders. For order code example, see p.104. ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. ●Orders for rod end mountings only are also accepted. ●For rod end mountings dimensions, see p.105. Inner Construction and Major Parts !8 !9 y !6 r u @3 @1 q @4 !0 i @0 !3 !2 !1 o t !7 w ua ir e !5 @2 !4 e Major Parts and Materials No. Parts q q Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Rod cover D y y Rod bushing u u Keep ring i i Piston A o o Cushion ring DNote 1 !0 !0 Split ring !1 !1 Pin !2 !2 Wear ring !3 !3 Magnet !4 !4 Cushion needle !5 !5 Snap ring !6 !6 Tie rod nut R Seals Parts Quantity No. !7 !7 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel φ32:Stainless steel, φ40∼φ125:Carbon steel for machine structural use !8 !8 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use !9 !9 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @0 @0 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @1 @1 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy @2 @2 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @3 @3 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @4 @4 Piston gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy ― Foot bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Axial right angled foot bracket Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Flange mounting bracket Materials Parts Plastic ― Trunnion bracket Rubber magnet ― Trunnion supporting bracket Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Knuckles Spring steel Cast iron Rolled steel for general structural use Cast iron Cast iron Cast iron Note 2 Notes: 1. Piston B for φ32∼φ50, cushion ring D for φ63∼φ125. 2: The I knuckle for only φ125, is carbon steel for machine structural use. Rolled steel for general structural use Rod seal Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket Piston gasket 2★ 1★ 2 2★ 1 2 pn e Bore size mm Materials Aluminum alloy Cushion gasket 32 DRP12 PWP32N CPF15 1.5×32 P9 S5 40 DRP16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 P12 S5 50 DRP20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 P16 S6 63 DRP20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 P16 S6 80 DRP25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 P21 S6 100 DRP30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 G25 S6 125 DRP35 PWP125N CPF45 1.5×125 G30 S7 Remark: Starred ★ designate items available as repair kits. Order code For standard cylinders・・・SRK-NDDA Bore size Note that the repair kit content consists of one rod seal, one piston seal, and two cylinder tube gaskets. Mass kg Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] Mass at zero stroke Bore size mm Basic type 32 0.68 0.79 0.82 0.88 0.98 1.20 0.00306 40 0.84 0.97 1.04 1.21 1.32 1.82 0.00457 50 1.35 1.52 1.67 1.74 1.90 2.40 63 1.86 2.09 2.38 2.39 2.56 80 3.16 3.54 4.01 4.76 100 4.22 4.69 5.50 125 9.48 9.95 10.86 Mass of knuckle Additional mass for Foot mounting Axial perpendicular Flange Trunnion type each 1mm stroke ZC□□□ CS□F Y type knuckle I type Trunnion type type foot mounting type mounting type (with supporting bracket) knuckle (with pin) CS□T Note Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). 0.22 0.16 0.27 0.16 0.00673 0.34 0.21 3.06 0.00760 0.34 0.21 4.32 5.04 0.01217 0.87 0.62 6.44 5.75 6.47 0.01612 1.47 1.24 12.35 12.89 14.44 0.02240 1.47 1.24 0.04 0.04 0.046 0.05 0.06 0.066 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke 1.52+(0.00673×100)=2.193kg 28 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke ua ir e 2‐O Connection port N N K Q W(width across flats) P φV φD 2-Cushion needle P φV 4×2‐L Q M M K J J I 2 2 H □T E G G F H E+Stroke F C+Stroke B □S φD DDAD B+Stroke A1+(Stroke×2) Code B C D E F G H I J K 187 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 M 6×1 Depth 14 40 191 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M 6×1 Depth 14 50 207 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M 6×1 Depth 14 63 210 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M 8×1.25 Depth 14 80 258 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 258 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 125 292 89 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Code M 32 3 40 4 50 7 63 8 N O P Q S T V W 16 Rc1/8 25.5 7 44 33 12 10 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 50 37 16 14 18 Rc3/8 24 12 62 47 20 17 18 Rc3/8 25 12 75 56 20 17 pn e 29 L A1 32 Bore size 80 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 94 70 25 21 100 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 112 84 30 26 125 14 20 Rc1/2 29 20 136 104 35 32 Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -1 Stroke A1+(Stroke×2) View from Z AP1 2 G 2-O Connection port N E+Stroke F N H 2 J AT AH φV AS J K W (width across flats) AD AG AE Z Code A1 B 32 187 47 40 191 49 50 207 57 63 210 57 80 258 75 100 258 75 125 292 89 Bore size G F H AF Bore size B+Stroke ua ir e AP2 E □T I C+Stroke B □S Code AA 32 153 40 165 50 173 63 184 80 200 100 200 125 220 AG AD K W (width across flats) AC+Stroke AB φV DDAD AB+Stroke AA+Stroke C E F G H I J K N O S T V W 93 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 114 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 136 104 35 32 AB AC AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 26.5 134 9.5 50 33 20.5 28 9 11 50 3.2 25.5 140 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 149 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 158 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 168 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 168 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 54 184 18 136 104 35 70 18 20 138 6 AD Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAD Bore size × -2 Stroke A1+(Stroke×2) C+Stroke B □S E □T H 2 N G 2-O Connection port pn e I B+Stroke G F E+Stroke F N H 2 J FD FG W (width across flats) FF FB FE Code φV K 4-φFP FQ φV FH FT FR FS J FG FD K W (width across flats) FC+Stroke FB+Stroke FA+Stroke A1 B C E F G H I J K N O S T V W 32 187 47 93 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 191 49 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 207 57 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 210 57 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 258 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 258 75 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 125 292 89 114 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 136 104 35 32 Bore size Code FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 32 119 57 73 23 81 63 14 22 9 54 14 44 8 40 119 59 73 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 123 67 73 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 130 67 76 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 150 88 82 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 158 88 82 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 125 172 106 80 46 213 175 21 69 18 144 35 137 18 Bore size 9 30 Dimensions of Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -3 Stroke A1+(Stroke×2) BE ua ir e DDAD C+Stroke B BF BA □T BB N I 2-O Connection port E+Stroke F N H 2 J φV φD φV BD H J BC B+Stroke G G K 4-φBP Code A1 B 32 187 47 40 191 49 50 207 57 63 210 57 80 258 75 100 258 75 125 292 89 Bore size Bore size Code BA 37 40 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 125 73 W (width across flats) C D E F G H I J K N O T V W 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 33 12 10 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 84 30 26 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 104 35 32 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 47 33 72 58 7 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 16 138 104 196 168 14 pn e 32 K 5 W (width across flats) 31 Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -11 Stroke A1+(Stroke×2) EE ua ir e EB EG C+Stroke B EG EA+ □S E □T G F H I G ET N 2 B+Stroke Stroke 2 2-O Connection port E+Stroke F 2 N H J φV EC φEPe9 ED φD φV J ER K K W (width across flats) Code A1 B 32 187 47 40 191 49 50 207 57 63 210 57 80 258 75 100 258 75 125 292 89 Bore size Bore size Code EA 32 93.5 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 125 146 W (width across flats) C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 114 60 68 21 36 50 36 16 M27×2 20 Rc1/2 136 104 35 32 EC EE EG EP 87 53 20 55 16 16 R1 30 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 208 159 37.5 158 25 25 R2 43 ED Bore size × Stroke pn e -11-11T HR HD HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 HQ ET ER EB ●With Supporting Bracket DDAD φD DDAD 4‐φHP HF HB HE Code HA HA HB HD HE HF HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 32 81 60 R16 85 70 66.5 40 9(Thru hole) 15 1 12 16 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 125 145 105 R30 208 183 164.5 85 18(Thru hole) 25 0 27 25 Bore size 32 Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Non-Rotating Double Rod Cylinders Bore size mm Item 40 50 63 80 100 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Flange mounting type, Trunnion type Mounting type Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.15∼1.0 {1.5∼10.2} MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range Operating speed range 1.5 {15.3} °C ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60.) 50∼500 mm/s Variable cushion at both ends of stroke Cushion Cushion stroke 16 mm 20 25 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine oil Class 1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Lubrication Non-rotating accuracy Allowable torque N・m {kgf・m} Port size Rc ±1° ±0.8° ±0.5° 1 {0.1} 3.4 {0.35} 10 {1.02} 1/4 3/8 1/2 Bore size and Stroke Bore Standard stroke sizer 40 50 63 mm Maximum potential manufacturing stroke 500 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 pn e 80 100 Order Code DDA 50× 100 − − − Bore size × Stroke Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Tube material Blank Standard (Aluminum tube) FT Steel tube specification Not available for cylinder with magnet. Cylinder specification DL Non-rotating Double Rod Cylinders DJL Non-rotating Double Rod Cylinders with bellows ( NEW DYNA Cylinders Basic model 33 ) − Remarks : 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 +0 , strokes of 251 ∼500 are +1.5 +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. − Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Mounting type Blank Basic type 1 Foot mounting type 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type 3 Flange mounting type 11 Trunnion type 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Lead wire length to ( Applicable ZC,CS□T type ) A : 1000mm B : 3000mm Rod end mounting Blank Without rod end mounting Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) I With I type knuckle ●Rod end mountings are included at time of delivery. If required for both sides, place separate orders. For order code example, see p.104. ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. ●Orders rod end mountings only are also accepted. ●For rod end mountings dimensions, see p.105. ua ir e Inner Construction and Major Parts !4 @3 !3 !7 w !9 u !8 !5 t o @4 @2 r @5 q !0 @1 !2 !1 @4 @2 o y !6 i @0 e A side B side Major Parts and Materials Parts No. q q Cylinder tube w w Piston rod A e e Piston rod B r r Tie rod t t Rod cover A y y Rod cover B u u Rod bushing A i i Rod bushing B o o Keep ring !0 !0 Piston !1 !1 Wear ring !2 !2 Magnet No. Parts !3 !3 Cushion needle Carbon steel for machine structural use !4 !4 Snap ring Carbon steel for machine structural use !5 !5 Tie rod nut R Carbon steel for machine structural use !6 !6 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel Aluminum die-cast !7 !7 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use Aluminum die-cast !8 !8 Spring pin Aluminum alloy !9 !9 Rod seal A Urethane rubber Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy @0 @0 Rod seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @1 @1 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @2 @2 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Plastic @3 @3 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Rubber magnet @4 @4 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @5 @5 Piston gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) pn e Seals Materials Aluminum alloy, and steel tube specifications are high carbon steel Materials Carbon steel for machine structural use Spring steel Rolled steel for general structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use Rod seal A Rod seal B Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket Piston gasket 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 40 PGR14A DRP16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 S10 S5 50 PGR19 DRP20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S14 S6 63 PGR19 DRP20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S14 S6 80 PGR23 DRP25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S18 S6 100 PGR23 DRP30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S18 S6 Parts Quantity Bore size mm Cushion gasket Mass Bore size mm 40 50 63 80 100 kg Mass at zero stroke Basic type Foot mounting type 0.84 (0.88) 1.35 (1.41) 1.86 (1.94) 3.16 (3.33) 4.22 (4.43) 0.97 (1.01) 1.52 (1.58) 2.09 (2.17) 3.54 (3.71) 4.69 (4.90) Axis right angled foot Flange mounting type mounting type 1.04 (1.08) 1.67 (1.73) 2.38 (2.46) 4.01 (4.18) 5.50 (5.71) Trunnion type Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) 1.32 (1.36) 1.90 (1.96) 2.56 (2.64) 4.32 (4.49) 5.75 (5.96) 1.82 (1.86) 2.40 (2.46) 3.06 (3.14) 5.04 (5.21) 6.47 (6.68) 1.21 (1.25) 1.74 (1.80) 2.39 (2.47) 4.76 (4.93) 6.44 (6.65) Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Remarks: 1. Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. Remarks: 2. A side=Non-rotating side Additional mass for Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] each 1mm stroke ZC□□□ CS□F Note CS□T 0.00433 (0.00564) 0.00670 (0.00877) 0.00757 (0.01015) 0.01193 (0.01661) 0.01420 (0.02001) 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 A side 0.87 A side 0.62 B side 1.47 B side 1.24 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke 1.52+(0.00670×100)=2.19kg 34 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke 2‐O Connection port N 2-Cushion needle P W1 (width across flats) I (width across flats) W (width across flats) K φV φD K1 J1 J H I1 □T 2 H 2 F E □S φD P 4×2‐L Q Q M ua ir e N M DDADL G G E+Stroke F C+Stroke B B+Stroke A1+(Stroke×2) Code B C D E F G H I I1 J J1 40 191 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 50 207 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 63 210 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 80 258 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 32 13 13 M22×1.5 M22×1.5 100 258 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 32 14 13 M26×1.5 M22×1.5 Bore size A1 Code K1 M N O P Q S T V W W1 40 M 6×1 Depth 14 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 50 37 16 14 14 50 M 6×1 Depth 14 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 62 47 20 17 19 63 M 8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 75 56 20 17 19 80 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 94 70 25 21 23 100 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 112 84 30 26 23 L pn e Bore size 35 K Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDADL Bore size × Stroke -1 ua ir e AP1 A1+(Stroke×2) AP2 □S □T F E B+Stroke G G 2 H I1 View from Z C+Stroke B N 2-O Connection port E+Stroke F H 2 N J I (width across flats) K K1 AT AH φV AS J1 W (width across flats) W1 (width across flats) AD AG AF AG A1 B 40 191 49 50 207 57 63 210 57 80 258 75 100 258 75 Bore size Bore size Code AA 40 165 50 173 63 184 80 200 100 200 AB+Stroke AA+Stroke Z Code AD AC+Stroke AB AE C E F G H I I1 J J1 N O S T V W W1 93 34 15 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 14 93 42 15 31 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 19 96 42 15 32 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 19 108 54 21 36 37 32 32 13 13 M22×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 23 108 54 21 36 37 36 32 14 13 M26×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 23 K K1 AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 25.5 140 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 149 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 158 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 168 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 168 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDADL Bore size × Stroke -2 pn e A1+(Stroke×2) □S C+Stroke B □T F E 2 H I1 B+Stroke G G N 2-O Connection port E+Stroke F N H 2 J1 K FD FG W1 (width across flats) FF φV K1 4-φFP FQ FG Code W (width across flats) FD FB+Stroke FC+Stroke FB FA+Stroke FE A1 B C E F G H I I1 J J1 N O S T V W W1 40 191 49 93 34 15 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 14 50 207 57 93 42 15 31 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 19 63 210 57 96 42 15 32 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 19 80 258 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 32 13 13 M22×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 23 100 258 75 108 54 21 36 37 36 32 14 13 M26×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 23 Bore size Code K K1 FT FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS 40 119 59 73 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 123 67 73 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 130 67 76 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 150 88 82 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 158 88 82 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size I (width across flats) FH FT FR FS J 9 36 Dimensions of Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) -3 Stroke ua ir e Bore size × A1+(Stroke×2) BE BF C+Stroke B □T BA BB N H I1 B+Stroke G G N 2-O Connection port E+Stroke F H 2 J φV K1 K W1 4-φBP (width across flats) Code A1 B 40 191 49 50 207 57 63 210 57 80 258 75 100 258 75 Bore size Bore size Code BA 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 W (width across flats) 5 C D E F G H I I1 J J1 K K1 N O T V W W1 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 37 16 14 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 47 20 17 19 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 56 20 17 19 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 32 13 13 M22×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 70 25 21 23 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 32 14 13 M26×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 84 30 26 23 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 pn e 40 37 I (width across flats) BC BD J1 φD DDADL Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × ua ir e A1+(Stroke×2) EE EG C+Stroke B EA+ □S □T F E I1 2 H ER G E+Stroke F N H 2 J K K1 W (width across flats) W1 (width across flats) Code C D E F G H I I1 J J1 N O S T V W W1 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 19 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 27 11 11 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 19 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 32 13 13 M22×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 23 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 32 14 13 M26×1.5 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 23 A1 B 40 191 49 50 207 57 63 210 57 80 258 100 258 Bore size Bore size Code EA 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 K1 K EB EC ED EE EG EP ER ET 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 Bore size × Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDADL -7-7C HR HD HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 HQ I (width across flats) φD EC ED G ET 2-O Connection port N J1 φEPe9 B+Stroke Stroke 2 4‐φHP HF HB HE Code HA HA HB HD HE HF HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size 38 φD EB EG -7 Stroke φV DDADL Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Tandem Cylinders Bore size mm Item 50 40 63 80 100 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type, Trunnion type Operating pressure range MPa{kgf/cm2} Proof pressure MPa{kgf/cm2} Operating temperature range Operating speed range 0.05∼0.7 {0.5∼7.1} 1.05 {10.7} °C ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60.) 30∼700 mm/s Variable cushion at both ends of stroke (applied to each cylinder) Cushion Cushion stroke mm 16 25 20 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine Oil No.1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Lubrication Port size Rc 1/4 3/8 1/2 Bore size and Stroke mm Stroke1 Bore size 50 0, 25, 50, 100 150, 200, 250 300, 350, 400 0, 25, 50, 100 150, 200, 250 50•63 300, 350, 400 450 0, 25, 50, 100 150, 200, 250 80•100 300, 350, 400 450, 550, 650 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 (Stroke 1+stroke 2) − − − 800 − − 1000 0, 25, 75, 125 175, 225, 275 325 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100 200, 250, 300 200 0, 25, 75, 125 175, 225, 275 325, 375, 425 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100, 150 200, 250, 300 0, 50, 100 0 200, 250, 300 200 350, 400 0, 25, 75, 125 175, 225, 275 325, 375, 425 525, 625 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100, 150 0, 50, 100 200, 250, 300 0, 50, 100 0, 50 200, 250, 300 200, 250, 300 150, 200 0 350, 400, 500 150, 200 100 350, 450 400 250 600 pn e Stroke 2 40 75 Maximum potential manufacturing stroke 0 1000 Caution: Figures in the table are a combination of stroke 2 (standard) corresponding ● Regarding stroke 1 and stroke 2 to stroke 1 (standard). Stroke 1 is the stroke of cylinder 1. Remaks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 +0 , strokes of 251∼1000 Stroke 2 is stroke 1 subtracted from the Cylinder 2 Cylinder 1 are +1.5 . +0 stroke of cylinder 2. 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. For the mximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. Order Code DDA 63× 100 × 50 − Bore size × Stroke1 × Stroke2 Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Cylinder specification T Tandem cylinders JT Tandem cylinders with bellows 39 NEW DYNA Cylinders Basic model − − Stroke 2 Stroke 1 − Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V Lead wire length CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V Applicable to CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V ZC,CS□T type CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V A : 1000mm CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V B : 3000mm CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Mounting type Blank Basic type 1 Foot mounting type 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type 3 Rod side flange mounting type 5 Head side flange mounting type 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) 8 Pivot mounting type 11 Trunnion type 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. ( ) Rod end mounting Blank Without rod end mounting Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) I With I type knuckle ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. ●Orders for tip fittings only are also accepted. ●For rod end mounting dimensions, see p.105. Inner Construction and Major Parts !3 @1 !2 ●Explanation of tandem cylinder operation C The tandem cylinder combines two cylinders in- line. It can be used as a two-step cylinder by supplying air to either port A or B, or it can obtain twice the thrust within the stroke 1. B Cylinder 2 Stroke 2 Stroke 1 Stroke 2 and stroke 1 are both retracted when air C. is supplied from port ○ A The rod moves stroke 1, when air is supplied A. from port ○ Cylinder 1 C B C B C B A The rod moves stroke 2, when air is supplied B. from port ○ A Doubled output is obtained before the end of A stroke 1, when air is supplied from both ports ○ A B. and ○ Major Parts and Materials No. Parts Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Head cover y y Spacer u u Rod bushing i i Keep ring o o Piston !0 !0 Wear ring !1 !1 Magnet !2 !2 Cushion needle !3 !3 Snap ring !4 !4 Tie rod nut R !5 !5 Tie rod nut H !6 !6 Rod end nut Materials No. Aluminum alloy !7 !7 Rod seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) Carbon steel for machine structural use !8 !8 Rod seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) Carbon steel for machine structural use !9 !9 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @0 @0 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @1 @1 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @2 @2 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy @3 @3 Piston gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @4 @4 Spacer gasket Aluminum alloy ― Foot bracket Materials Parts Synthetic rubber (NBR) Rolled steel for general structural use Plastic ― Axial right angled foot bracket Cast iron Rubber magnet ― Flange mounting bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Clevis mounting bracket Cast iron Spring steel ― Clevis supporting bracket Cast iron Rolled steel for general structural use ― Pivot bracket Cast iron Chrome-molybdenum steel ― Trunnion bracket Cast iron Rolled steel for general structural use ― Trunnion supporting bracket Cast iron ― Knuckles Cast iron pn e q q !5 ua ir e !6 !7 u !4 r i @2 @0 e w q @3 o !9 !1 !0 t @4 !8 y Seals Parts Rod seal A Rod seal B Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket Cushion gasket Piston gasket 2★ 1★ 2 4 4 4★ 1 1 40 DRP16 PNU16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 S5 S10 S25 50 DRP20 PNU20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S6 S14 G30 63 DRP20 PNU20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S6 S14 G30 80 DRP25 PNU25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S6 S18 G35 100 DRP30 PNU30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S6 S18 G40 Quantity Bore size mm Spacer gasket Remark: Starred ★ designate items available as repair kits. Order code SRK-NDDA Bore size Note that the repair kit content consists of one rod seal, one piston seal, and two cylinder tube gaskets. Mass kg Mass at zero stroke Bore size right angled foot Flange mounting type Clevis mounting type Clevis mounting type mm Basic type Foot mounting type Axismounting 〔with pin〕 〔with supporting bracket〕 Pivot mounting type Trunnion type type Additional mass for each 1mm stroke Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] Trunnion type 〔with supporting bracket〕 Stroke1 Stroke2 40 1.40 1.53 1.60 1.77 1.67 2.37 1.58 1.88 2.38 0.00300 0.00300 50 2.20 2.37 2.52 2.59 2.59 3.29 2.46 2.75 3.25 0.00428 0.00428 63 2.97 3.20 3.49 3.50 3.45 4.15 3.39 3.67 4.17 0.00515 0.00515 80 5.15 5.53 6.00 6.75 6.07 6.79 6.23 6.31 7.03 0.00834 0.00834 100 6.61 7.08 7.89 8.83 7.85 8.57 8.00 8.14 8.86 0.01061 0.01061 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). ZC□□□ CS□T Note 0.04 0.04 CS□F 0.05 0.06 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke 2.37+(0.00428×100)+(0.00428×50)=3.012kg 40 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × × Stroke1 N M Q M Q P P P φD W (width across flats) φV K φD N M M Q 4‐Cushion needle P 4×2‐L N N ua ir e 4‐O Connection port Stroke2 Q DDAT J 2 H □T Code G G C+Stroke1+Stroke2 B A2 40 257 50 265 63 271 80 318 100 318 G C+Stroke1 R Code B C D E F G G2 H I J K 49 93 32 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 57 93 38 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 57 96 38 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 75 108 44 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 75 108 50 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M N O P Q R S T V W 40 M 6×1 Depth 14 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 2 50 37 16 14 50 M 6×1 Depth 14 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 2 62 47 20 17 63 M 8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 2 75 56 20 17 80 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 2 94 70 25 21 100 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 2 112 84 30 26 L pn e Bore size 41 G G2 A2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 □S Bore size F E I Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × × Stroke1 -1 Stroke2 ua ir e DDAT □S □T N 4-O Connection port C+Stroke1 G R G N G N N φV AS G AT AH AP2 F 2 E H J I AP1 A2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 G2 B View from Z K W (width across flats) AF AE AD AB AG AG AD AC2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 AA2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 Z Code A2 B 40 257 49 50 265 57 63 271 57 80 318 75 100 318 75 Bore size Bore size Code AA2 40 278 50 286 63 300 80 333 100 333 C E F G G2 H I J K N O R S T V W 93 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 93 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 96 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 108 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 108 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 AB AC2 AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 25.5 253 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 262 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 274 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 301 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 301 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke1 × -2 Stroke2 pn e DDAT □S □T I B 4-O Connection port G N C+Stroke1 G R G N G N N φV K W 4-φFP (width across flats) FQ FF FE Code F 2 FR FH FT FS E H J A2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 G2 FD FG FG FD FC2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 FA2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 FB A2 B C E F G G2 H I J K N O R S T V W 40 257 49 93 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 50 265 57 93 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 63 271 57 96 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 80 318 75 108 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 100 318 75 108 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 Bore size Code FA2 FB FC2 FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 40 232 59 186 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 236 67 186 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 246 67 192 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 283 88 215 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 291 88 215 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size 9 42 Dimensions of Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × BE BF □T I Stroke1 × -3 Stroke2 ua ir e DDAT A2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 G2 B BA BB Code A2 B 40 257 49 50 265 57 63 271 57 80 318 75 100 318 75 Bore size Code BA 40 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 C+Stroke1 G R G N G N N φD N K W (width across flats) 4-φBP Bore size 4-O Connection port φV BD BC H J G 5 C D G G2 H I J K N O R T V W 93 32 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 37 16 14 93 38 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 47 20 17 96 38 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 56 20 17 108 44 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 70 25 21 108 50 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 84 30 26 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 Dimensions of Head Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke1 × -5 Stroke2 pn e DDAT BE BF □S □T I B E F H J G 4-O Connection port G C+Stroke1 G N BB G N N BD BC φD φV N BG2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 G2 K W 4-φBP (width across flats) B C D E F G G2 H I J K N O S T V W 49 93 32 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 Code BB BC BD BE BF BG2 BP 40 10 52 36 84 70 265 7 50 10 65 47 104 86 273 9 63 10 76 56 116 98 279 9 80 16 95 70 143 119 332 12 100 16 115 84 162 138 332 12 Bore size 43 Code 40 Bore size Dimensions of Clevis Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × I (width across flats) B C 49 93 50 57 93 63 57 96 80 75 108 100 75 108 Code CC C+Stroke1 G N G N N CF /f8 CD 40 Bore size N G H9 φD φV Code 4-O Connection port G F 2 □S PA1 □T +0.5 CT CT CP+0.7 CJ E φC K W (width across flats) Bore size -7 Stroke2 CA2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 CB2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 G2 B E H J × Stroke1 ua ir e DDAT CA2 40 287 50 297 63 303 80 369 100 369 D E F G G2 H I J K N O S T V W 32 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 38 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 38 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 44 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 50 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 CB2 CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 274 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 282 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 288 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 348 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 348 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 Bore size × Stroke1 pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDAT × -7-7C Stroke2 GA2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 Code GH GC GG GD GH GF GE GJ GT GI GB 4‐φGP GA2 GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GI GJ GP GT 40 340.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 11 (Thru hole) 8 50 348.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 11 (Thru hole) 8 63 354.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 11 (Thru hole) 8 80 434.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 14 (Thru hole) 12 100 434.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 14 (Thru hole) 12 Bore size 44 Dimensions of Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAT Bore size × × Stroke2 -8 ua ir e Stroke1 DA2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 B F 2 E H J I (width across flats) φD φV B C 49 93 50 57 93 63 57 96 80 75 108 100 75 108 Code H9 DA2 40 288 50 296 63 302 80 369 100 368 D E F G G2 H I J K N O S T V W 32 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 38 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 38 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 44 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 50 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 DB2 DC DD DE DF DJ DQ 274 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 282 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 288 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 348 32 R24 20 R25 21 0 32 -0.100 348 32 R24 20 R26 20 0 32 -0.100 pn e 45 □T DQ G N DD 40 Bore size □S DF K Code N DJ DC C+Stroke1 E φD W (width across flats) Bore size G DB2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 G2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 4-O G G Connection port N N Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -11 Stroke2 ua ir e EB EE □S □T I EG A2+(Stroke1×2)+Stroke2 C+Stroke1+Stroke2 G2 B EA+ F E H J R G G ET N G N 4-O Connection port G N N φD 2 C+Stroke1 Stroke1+Stroke2 2 φD φV EC ER φEPe9 EG × Stroke1 ED DDAT K W (width across flats) Code A2 B 40 257 49 50 265 57 63 271 57 80 318 75 100 318 75 Bore size Bore size Code EA 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 C D E F G G2 H I J K N O R S T V W 93 32 34 15 31 20 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 20 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 25 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 25 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 EB EC ED EE EG EP ER ET 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 Stroke2 -11-11T ●With Supporting Bracket DDAT Stroke1 pn e Bore size × HR HD HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 HQ × 4‐φHP HF HB HA HE Code HA HB HD HE HF HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size 46 Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Dual Stroke Cylinders Bore size mm Item 50 40 63 80 100 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Flange mounting type, Trunnion type Mounting type Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.05∼0.7 {0.5∼7.1} MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range Operating speed range 1.05 {10.7} ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60.) 30∼700 ˚C mm/s Variable cushion at both ends of stroke (applied to each cylinder) Cushion Cushion stroke 16 mm 25 20 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine Oil No.1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Lubrication Port size Rc 1/4 3/8 1/2 Bore size and Stroke mm Bore size 40 50 63 80 Standard stroke 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 800 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 600, 700 ●Regarding stroke 1 and stroke 2 Stroke 1 is the stroke of cylinder 1. Stroke 2 is the stroke of cylinder 2. 1000 1000 Cylinder2 Cylinder1 Stroke2 Stroke1 +1 , +0 Remarks : 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are strokes of 251∼1000 are +1.5 +0 . 2. The table at left applies to both stroke 1 and stroke 2. However, do not let (stroke 1 + stroke 2) exceed the maximum stroke. 3. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 4. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. pn e 100 Maximum potential manufacturing stroke Order Code DDA 63 × 100× 50 − − Bore size × Stroke 1 × Stroke 2 Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Attached on both sides ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Cylinder specification W Dual stroke cylinders JW Dual stroke cylinders with bellow NEW DYNA Cylinders Basic model 47 − − Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Mounting type Blank Basic type 1 Foot mounting type 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type 3 Flange mounting type 11 Trunnion type 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Lead wire length to ( Applicable ZC,CS□T type ) A : 1000mm B : 3000mm Rod end mounting Blank Without rod end mounting Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) I With I type knuckle ●Rod end mountings are included at time of delivery. If required for both sides, place separate orders. For order code example, see p.104. ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. ●Orders for rod end mounting only are also accepted. ●For rod end mounting dimensions, see p.105. Inner Construction and Major Parts !3 @0 !2 !6 !7 u !4 r i @1 !9 w q o !8 !1 !0 t y ua ir e e !5 ● Explanation of dual stroke cylinder operation D CB A Stroke 2 and stroke 1 are retracted when air is A and ○ D. supplied from Ports ○ Dual stroke cylinders are a set of two cylinders combined back-to-back. The cylinder body can be fixed in place and the left- and right-side strokes controlled separately, and can also be used to obtain two-step or three-step strokes by fixing the piston rod on one side in place. Cylinder2 D Cylinder1 C Stroke2 D C Stroke2 D C B Stroke1 A B A Stroke 2 moves when air is supplied from Ports ○ C. and ○ A B Stroke1 A Major Parts and Materials No. Parts q q Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Head cover y y Spacer u u Rod bushing i i Keep ring o o Piston !0 !0 Wear ring !1 !1 Magnet !2 !2 Cushion needle !3 !3 Snap ring !4 !4 Tie rod nut R Parts Stroke 1 and stroke 2 move when air is supplied C and ○ B. from Ports ○ Materials No. Aluminum alloy !5 !5 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel Carbon steel for machine structural use !6 !6 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use !7 !7 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast !8 !8 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast !9 !9 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy @0 @0 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy @1 @1 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy ― Foot bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Aluminum alloy ― Axial right angled foot bracket Cast iron Plastic ― Flange mounting bracket Rolled steel for general structural use Parts Materials Rubber magnet ― Trunnion bracket Cast iron Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Trunnion supporting bracket Cast iron Spring steel ― Knuckles Cast iron Rolled steel for general structural use pn e Seals B Stroke 1 moves when air is supplied from Ports ○ D. and ○ Rod seal Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket 2★ 2★ 4 4★ 4 40 DRP16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 S5 50 DRP20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S6 63 DRP20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S6 80 DRP25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S6 100 DRP30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S6 Bore size mm Quantity Cushion gasket Remark: Starred ★ designate items available as repair kits. Order code SRK-NDDA Bore size Note that the repair kit is for a standard cylinder and its content consists of one rod seal, one piston seal, and two cylinder tube gaskets. Mass kg Additional Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] Bore size Trunnion type mass for each Axis right angled ZC□□□ mm Basic type Foot mounting type foot Flange mounting type Trunnion type CS□F (with supporting bracket) 1mm stroke mounting type CS□T Note2 0.00300 2.30 1.80 1.69 1.52 1.45 40 1.32 0.04 0.05 0.00428 3.13 2.63 2.47 2.40 2.25 50 2.08 Mass at zero stroke 63 2.78 3.01 3.30 3.31 3.48 3.98 0.00515 80 4.74 5.12 5.59 6.34 5.90 6.62 0.00834 100 6.02 6.49 7.30 8.24 7.55 8.27 0.01061 Notes: 1. Applicable to both stroke 1 and stroke 2. 2. For lead wire length A (1000mm). 0.04 0.06 Mass of one knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and stroke 1 of 100mm and stroke 2 of 50mm 2.25+(0.00428×100)+(0.00428×50)=2.892kg 48 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × × Stroke1 Stroke2 4-O Connection port P N P Q Q M M M N P N W (width across flats) K φV J I J E □S 2 2 H □T φD W (width across flats) K φV φD Q 4‐Cushion needle P 4×2‐L M ua ir e N Q DDAW F C+Stroke2 G G G G C+Stroke1 5 2×C+Stroke1+Stroke2+5 B H E F B A3+Stroke1+Stroke2 Code Bore size A3 40 289 50 305 63 311 80 371 100 371 Code Bore size M 4 50 7 63 8 80 11 100 12 C D E F G H I J K 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 49 L N O P Q S T V W 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 50 37 16 14 18 Rc3/8 24 12 62 47 20 17 18 Rc3/8 25 12 75 56 20 17 20 Rc1/2 29 16 94 70 25 21 20 Rc1/2 29 18 112 84 30 26 pn e 40 B 49 Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAW Bore size × × Stroke1 -1 Stroke2 AP1 ua ir e A3+Stroke1+Stroke2 2×C+Stroke1+Stroke2+5 B AP2 □S C+Stroke2 □T E I View from Z F H G G 4-O Connection port N 2 B C+Stroke1 5 G G N E F N N H 2 J K AT AH AS φV φV J W (width across flats) AF K AD AG AG AD AC3+Stroke1+Stroke2 AB AE W (width across flats) AB AA3+Stroke1+Stroke2 Z Code A3 B 40 289 49 50 305 57 63 311 57 80 371 75 100 371 75 Bore size Bore size Code AA3 40 263 50 271 63 285 80 313 100 313 C E F G H I K N O S T V W 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 J AB AC3 AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 25.5 238 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 247 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 259 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 281 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 281 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAW Bore size × Stroke1 × -2 Stroke2 A3+Stroke1+Stroke2 2×C+Stroke1+Stroke2+5 B □S pn e C+Stroke2 □T E I F H 2 G G N 4-O Connection port N B C+Stroke1 5 G G N F E H 2 N J K FD FG W (width across flats) FF FG FD FC3+Stroke1+Stroke2 FB FE Code φV φV FS FH FT FR K 4-φFP FQ J W (width across flats) FB FA3+Stroke1+Stroke2 A3 B C E F G H I K N O S T V W 40 289 49 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 305 57 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 311 57 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 371 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 371 75 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 Bore size Code J FA3 FB FC3 FD FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 40 217 59 171 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 221 67 171 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 231 67 177 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 263 88 195 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 271 88 195 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size FE 9 50 Dimensions of Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke1 × -3 Stroke2 ua ir e DDAW A3+Stroke1+Stroke2 2×C+Stroke1+Stroke2+5 B BF □T I BA BB E F C+Stroke2 G G N H 5 G G N 4-O Connection port B C+Stroke1 N F 2 N Code A3 B 40 289 49 50 305 57 63 311 57 80 371 75 100 371 75 Bore size Code BA 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 K W (width across flats) 5 C D E F G H I J K N O T V W 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 84 30 26 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 pn e 40 J φV K W 4-φBP (width across flats) Bore size 51 H φV BC BD J E φD BE Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) DDAW Bore size × × Stroke1 -11 Stroke2 A3+Stroke1+Stroke2 ua ir e EE EA+ EG □S C+Stroke2 □T E I ER H F 2 G 5 C+Stroke1 G ET N N N 4-O Connection port E H 2 J φV φD F N φV ED EC G G J φEPe9 B Stroke 2 K W (width across flats) K W (width across flats) Code A3 B 40 289 49 50 305 57 63 311 57 80 371 75 100 371 75 Bore size Bore size Code EA 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 C D E F G H I K N O S T V W 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 EB EC ED EE EG EP ER ET 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 Bore size × Stroke1 pn e × Stroke2 -11-11T HD HJ HI HR HT φEPe9/H9 HQ 4‐φHP HF J 113 ●With Supporting Bracket DDAW HB HE Code φD EG 2×C+Stroke1+Stroke2+5 B EB HA HA HB HD HE HF HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size 52 NEW DYNA Stroke Adjusting Cylinders Symbol ua ir e Push side stroke adjusting type, Pull side stroke adjusting type ●Push side stroke adjusting type Specifications ●Pull side stroke adjusting type Bore size mm Item Operating method 40 50 63 80 Media Air Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Trunnion type Push side stroke Stroke adjusting mm range Pull side stroke −50∼0 (To the specified stroke) Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.05∼1.0 {0.5∼10.2} −60∼0 (To the specified stroke) MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range 1.5 {15.3} °C ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor is 0∼60.) 50∼700 Note 1 Push side stroke Operating speed mm/s range Pull side stroke 30∼700 Note 2 Head cover side: Variable cushion Rod cover side: Rubber bumpers Push side stroke Cushion Rod cover side: Variable cushion Pull side stroke Cushion stroke 16 mm Lubrication Head cover side: none 25 20 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine oil Class 1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Port size Notes : Notes : Notes : Notes : 100 Double acting type with stroke adjusting mechanism 3/8 1/4 Rc 1/2 1. For pull side: 50∼500mm/s, in the case of push side (Stroke adjusting side)φ40: Adjustment 10mm or less, φ50, 63: Adjustment 15mm or less, φ80, 100: Adjustment 20mm or less. 1. For pull side: 50∼200mm/s, in the case of φ40: Adjustment 10mm or more, φ50, 63: Adjustment 15mm or more, φ80, 100: Adjustment 20mm or more. 2. For push side: 30∼500mm/s, in the case of pull side (Stroke adjusting side)φ40: Adjustment 10mm or less, φ50, 63: Adjustment 15mm or less, φ80, 100: Adjustment 20mm or less. 2. For push side: 30∼150mm/s, in the case of φ40: Adjustment 10mm or more, φ50, 63: Adjustment 15mm or more, φ80, 100: Adjustment 20mm or more. Bore Size and Stroke ●Push side stroke adjusting type Bore mm Maximum potential manufacturing stroke pn e Standard stroke sizer 40 50 63 80 100 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 700 450, 500, 600, 700 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 900 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 Remarks : 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 +0 , strokes of 251 ∼1000 are +1.5 +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. Order Code DDA P 50 × 100 Bore size × Stroke 53 − − − ●Pull side stroke adjusting type Bore sizer 40 Standard stroke mm Maximum potential manufacturing stroke 1000 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 50 63 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 80 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 1500 100 Remarks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 +0 , strokes of 251 +2.0 ∼1000 are +1.5 +0 , and strokes of 1001 or more are +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. − Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own Mounting type durable temperature, and is not a Blank Basic type temperature for cylinder use. 1 Foot mounting type 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type Cylinder specification 3 Rod side flange mounting type P Push side stroke adjusting cylinders 11 Trunnion type E Pull side stroke adjusting cylinders JP Push side stroke adjusting type with bellows 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) EJ Pull side stroke adjusting type with bellows ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. NEW DYNA Cylinders ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also Basic model accepted. Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Lead wire length Applicable to ZC,CS□T type A : 1000mm B : 3000mm ( Rod end mounting Blank Without rod end mounting Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) I With I type knuckle ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. ●Orders for rod end mountning only are also accepted. ●For rod end mountning dimensions, see p.105. ) Inner Construction and Major Parts qe ua ir e ●Push side stroke adjusting type !5 @7 !4 @1 @4 y !6 r u @8 @6 @9 !0 i @5 !3 !2 !1 o t !7 @3 !8 w ●Pull side stroke adjusting type !5 @4 !4 !9 @1 y !6 r !0 @5 @3 e w q @6 !1 !7 !3 !2 @5 @3 t @7 u @0 !8 o i ●Instructions for stroke adjustment Stroke adjusting is performed by rotating the adjusting stopper (push side !9) and stroke adjusting screw (pull side i). After completing stroke adjustment, fix in place with a lock nut. If mounting a sensor switch, move the mounting location of the sensor switch by the length of the adjusted stroke. Major Parts and Materials ●Push side stroke adjusting type Parts @0 !9 @2 ●Pull side stroke adjusting type Materials No. Aluminum alloy q q Cylinder tube Carbon steel for machine structural use w w Piston rod Carbon steel for machine structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use e e Tie rod Carbon steel for machine structural use Aluminum die-cast r r Rod cover Aluminum die-cast t t Head cover Aluminum die-cast Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy y y Rod bushing Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy Aluminum alloy u u Houseing Carbon steel for machine structural use Aluminum alloy i i Adjusting screw Carbon steel for machine structural use Aluminum alloy o o Button bolt Chrome-molybdenum steel Carbon steel for machine structural use !0 !0 Keep ring Aluminum alloy Carbon steel for machine structural use !1 !1 Piston Aluminum alloy Plastic !2 !2 Wear ring Rubber magnet !3 !3 Magnet Carbon steel for machine structural use !4 !4 Cushion needle Spring steel !5 !5 Snap ring Rolled steel for general structural use !6 !6 Tie rod nut R Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel !7 !7 Tie rod nut H Stopper plate Carbon steel for machine structural use !8 !8 Lock nut Rolled steel for general structural use !9 !9 Adjusting stopper Carbon steel for machine structural use !9 !9 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use @0 @0 Rubber bumper Urethane rubber @0 @0 Seal washer Nitrile rubber with metal ring @1 @1 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use @1 @1 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @2 @2 Lock nut Rolled steel for general structural use @2 @2 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @3 @3 Button bolt Chrome-molybdenum steel @3 @3 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @5 @5 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @5 @5 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @6 @6 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @6 @6 Piston gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @7 @7 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @7 @7 Housing gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @8 @8 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @9 @9 Piston gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) No. Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Rod cover y y Rod bushing u u Keep ring i i Piston o o Piston !0 !0 Split ring !1 !1 (Detent) pin !2 !2 Wear ring !3 !3 Magnet !4 !4 Cushion needle !5 !5 Snap ring !6 !6 Tie rod nut R !7 !7 !8 !8 pn e q q Parts Materials Aluminum alloy Aluminum die-cast Plastic Rubber magnet Carbon steel for machine structural use Spring steel Rolled steel for general structural use Chrome-molybdenum steel Seals ●Push side stroke adjusting type ●Pull side stroke adjusting type Rod seal Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket Cushion gasket Piston gasket 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 40 DRP16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 S5 P12 40 DRP16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 S5 S10 S26 DT1-12 50 DRP20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S6 P16 50 DRP20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S6 S14 S32 DT1-16 63 DRP20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S6 P16 63 DRP20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S6 S14 S32 DT1-16 80 DRP25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S6 P21 80 DRP25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S6 S18 S38 DT1-20 100 DRP30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S6 P25 100 DRP30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S6 S18 S38 DT1-20 Parts Quantity Bore size mm Parts Quantity Bore size mm Rod seal 1 Piston Cushion Tube Cushion Piston Housing Seal gasket gasket gasket gasket whaser seal seal 1 2 2 54 Mass ●Push side stroke adjusting type Bore size mm Basic type Foot mounting type kg Additional mass Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] for each 1mm Trunnion type ZC□□□ Flange mounting type Trunnion type 〔with CS□F stroke supporting bracket〕 CS□T Note 0.00457 2.55 2.05 1.94 0.04 0.05 0.00673 3.58 3.08 2.92 Mass at zero stroke Axis right angled foot mounting type 1.57 1.70 1.77 50 2.53 2.70 2.85 63 3.38 3.61 3.90 3.91 4.08 4.58 0.00760 80 6.10 6.48 6.95 7.70 7.26 7.98 0.01217 100 8.45 8.92 9.73 10.67 9.98 10.70 0.01612 Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 ua ir e 40 Mass of one knuckle Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). 0.04 0.06 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100 mm stroke 2.70+(0.00673×100)=3.373kg ●Pull side stroke adjusting type Bore size mm Basic type Foot mounting type kg Additional mass Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] for each 1mm Trunnion type ZC□□□ Flange mounting type Trunnion type 〔with CS□F stroke supporting bracket〕 CS□T Note 0.00300 2.12 1.62 1.51 0.04 0.05 0.00428 2.92 2.42 2.26 Mass at zero stroke Axis right angled foot mounting type 40 1.14 1.27 1.34 50 1.87 2.04 2.19 63 2.54 2.77 3.06 3.07 3.24 3.74 0.00515 80 4.67 5.05 5.52 6.27 5.83 6.55 0.00834 100 6.35 6.82 7.63 8.57 7.88 8.60 0.01061 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). 0.04 Mass of one knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 0.06 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100 mm stroke 2.04+(0.00428×100)=2.468kg Dimensions of Push Side Stroke Adjusting Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke 2-O Connection port N P P 2‐Cushion needle I4 (width across flats) W4 K4 (width across flats) pn e φD φV φD4 φV φD W (width across flats) K 4‐L Q Q M N M DDAP J4 J I E □S G G F F4 (Post-adjustment stroke) Z4 E4 B4+Stroke C+Stroke B A4+(Stroke×2) A4 B B4 C D D4 E E4 F F4 G H I I4 40 254 49 112 93 32 30 34 11 15 25 31 21 22 19 8 50 274 57 124 93 38 36 42 14 15 25 31 29 27 22 11 63 277 57 124 96 38 36 42 14 15 25 32 29 27 22 11 80 321 75 138 108 44 45 54 17 21 35 36 37 32 27 13 100 321 75 138 108 50 50 54 17 21 35 36 37 36 27 14 Bore size Code J J4 K M N O P Q S T V W W4 Z4 40 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 M6×1 Depth 14 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 50 37 16 14 27 74 50 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 62 47 20 17 32 83 63 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 75 56 20 17 32 83 80 12 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 94 70 25 21 41 84 100 12 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 112 84 30 26 46 84 Bore size 55 Code 2 2 H □T K4 L Dimensions of Push Side Stroke Adjusting Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAP Bore size × -1 Stroke A4+(Stroke×2) AP2 □S □T F F4 (Post-adjustment stroke) G G E4 Z4 ua ir e E I View from Z AP1 B4+Stroke C+Stroke B N 2 H N 2-O Connection port 2 J AT AH AS φV φD4 φV J4 K W (width across flats) AF W4 (width across flats) AD AE AG AG Code A4 B 40 254 49 50 274 57 63 277 57 80 321 75 100 321 75 Bore size Code S T 40 50 37 50 62 47 63 75 56 80 94 70 100 112 84 Bore size I4 (width across flats) AD AB4+Stroke AC4+Stroke AB Z K4 AA4+Stroke B4 C D4 E E4 F F4 G H I I4 J J4 N O 112 93 30 34 11 15 25 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 124 93 36 42 14 15 25 31 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 18 Rc3/8 124 96 36 42 14 15 25 32 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 18 Rc3/8 138 108 45 54 17 21 35 36 37 32 27 13 12 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 20 Rc1/2 138 108 50 54 17 21 35 36 37 36 27 14 12 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 20 Rc1/2 K4 K V W W4 Z4 AA4 AB AB4 AC4 AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 16 14 27 74 190 25.5 63.5 165 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 20 17 32 83 198 29 71 174 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 20 17 32 83 209 26 68 183 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 25 21 41 84 235 45 73 203 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 30 26 46 84 235 45 73 203 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 Dimensions of Push Side Stroke Adjusting Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAP Bore size × □S -2 Stroke A4+(Stroke×2) □T F I 2 H N F4 (Post-adjustment stroke) G G pn e E B4+Stroke C+Stroke B E4 Z4 2 N 2-O Connection port J φD4 W4 (width across flats) FD FG FF FB FE Code φV φV FS FH FT FR K W (width across flats) 4-φFP FQ J4 K4 I4 (width across flats) FG FD FC4+Stroke FB4+Stroke FA4+Stroke A4 B B4 C D4 E E4 F F4 G H I I4 J J4 K K4 N O 40 254 49 112 93 30 34 11 15 25 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 18 Rc1/4 50 274 57 124 93 36 42 14 15 25 31 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 18 Rc3/8 63 277 57 124 96 36 42 14 15 25 32 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 18 Rc3/8 80 321 75 138 108 45 54 17 21 35 36 37 32 27 13 12 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 20 Rc1/2 100 321 75 138 108 50 54 17 21 35 36 37 36 27 14 12 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 20 Rc1/2 FT Bore size Code S T V W W4 Z4 FA4 FB FB4 FC4 FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS 40 50 37 16 14 27 74 144 59 97 98 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 62 47 20 17 32 83 148 67 109 98 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 75 56 20 17 32 83 155 67 109 101 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 94 70 25 21 41 84 185 88 116 117 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 112 84 30 26 46 84 193 88 116 117 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size 9 56 Dimensions of Push Side Stroke Adjusting Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -3 Stroke ua ir e DDAP A4+(Stroke×2) BE □T BB BA I B4+Stroke C+Stroke B BF N H F4 (Post-adjustment stroke) G G N 2-O Connection port E4 Z4 2 J4 Code A4 B 40 254 49 50 274 57 63 277 57 80 321 75 100 321 75 Bore size Code φV φD4 BC BD D φV J 4‐φBP K W (width across flats) W4 (width across flats) 5 B4 C D4 E4 F4 G H I I4 J J4 K K4 112 93 30 11 25 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 124 93 36 14 25 31 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 124 96 36 14 25 32 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 138 108 45 17 35 36 37 32 27 13 12 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 138 108 50 17 35 36 37 36 27 14 12 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 O T V W W4 Z4 BA BB BC BD BE BF BP 40 18 Rc1/4 37 16 14 27 74 39 10 52 36 84 70 7 50 18 Rc3/8 47 20 17 32 83 47 10 65 47 104 86 9 63 18 Rc3/8 56 20 17 32 83 47 10 76 56 116 98 9 80 20 Rc1/2 70 25 21 41 84 59 16 95 70 143 119 12 100 20 Rc1/2 84 30 26 46 84 59 16 115 84 162 138 12 N pn e Bore size 57 I4 K4 (width across flats) Dimensions of Push Side Stroke Adjusting Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × A4+(Stroke×2) EE EG EA+ □S □T F E I 2 H ER B4+Stroke C+Stroke B Stroke 2 ET G G 2-O Connection port N F4 (Post-adjustment stroke) φD4 φD J4 φV φD ED EC φEPe9 J K W (width across flats) Code A4 B 40 254 49 50 274 57 63 277 57 80 321 75 100 321 75 Bore size Code E4 Z4 2 N φV EB EG -11 Stroke ua ir e DDAP I4 K4 (width across flats) W4 (width across flats) B4 C D D4 E E4 F F4 G H I I4 J J4 K K4 112 93 32 30 34 11 15 25 31 21 22 19 8 7 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 124 93 38 36 42 14 15 25 31 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 124 96 38 36 42 14 15 25 32 29 27 22 11 10 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 138 108 44 45 54 17 21 35 36 37 32 27 13 12 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 138 108 50 50 54 17 21 35 36 37 36 27 14 12 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 N O S T V W W4 Z4 EA EB EC ED EG EP ER ET 40 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 27 74 95.5 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 50 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 32 83 103.5 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 63 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 32 83 105 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 80 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 41 84 129 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 100 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 46 84 129 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 Bore size Bore size × HD HR HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 HQ -11-11T Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDAP EE 4‐φHP HF HB HE Code HA HA HB HD HE HF HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size 58 Dimensions of Pull Side Stroke Adjusting Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke 2-O Connection port N M Q P 2-Cushion needle P W (width across flats) K I5 (width across flats) K5 □V5 φV 4‐L φD M ua ir e N Q DDAE J I 2 H □T F E G G G5 J5 Stroke adjusting range Z5 C5+Stroke B □S B5 A5+Stroke Code A5 B 40 238 49 50 249 57 63 252 57 80 296 75 100 296 75 Bore size Code B5 C5 D E F G G5 H I I5 J J5 K K5 82 107 32 34 15 31 14 21 22 19 8 12 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 85 107 38 42 15 31 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 85 110 38 42 15 32 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 91 130 44 54 21 36 22 37 32 30 13 19 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 91 130 50 54 21 36 22 37 36 30 14 19 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 M N O P Q S T V V5 W Z5 40 M6×1 Depth 14 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 50 37 16 8 14 10 50 M6×1 Depth 14 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 62 47 20 11 17 10 63 M8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 75 56 20 11 17 10 80 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 94 70 25 14 21 12 100 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 112 84 30 14 26 12 L pn e Bore size 59 Dimensions of Pull Side Stroke Adjusting Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAE Bore size × -1 Stroke A5+Stroke □S C5+Stroke B5 ua ir e B □T F E I G 2 H G5 J5 Stroke adjusting range Z5 G N 2-O Connection port N AH AT AP2 AS AP1 φV J View from Z W (width across flats) AF AE AD AG AG Z Code A5 B 40 238 49 50 249 57 63 252 57 80 296 75 100 296 75 Code AB5MAX. AA5+Stroke B5 C5 E F G G5 H I I5 J J5 K K5 82 107 34 15 31 14 21 22 19 8 12 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 85 107 42 15 31 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 85 110 42 15 32 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 91 130 54 21 36 22 37 32 30 13 19 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 91 130 54 21 36 22 37 36 30 14 19 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 S T V V5 W Z5 AA5 AB AB5 AC5 AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 50 37 16 8 14 10 179 25.5 58.5 154 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 62 47 20 11 17 10 187 29 57 163 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 75 56 20 11 17 10 198 26 54 172 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 94 70 25 14 21 12 222 45 61 190 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 Rc1/2 112 84 30 14 26 12 222 45 61 190 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 N O 40 18 Rc1/4 50 18 Rc3/8 63 18 Rc3/8 80 20 Rc1/2 100 20 Bore size K5 AD AC5+Stroke AB Bore size □V5 I5 (width across flats) K Dimensions of Pull Side Stroke Adjusting Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAE Bore size × -2 Stroke A5+Stroke □S C5+Stroke pn e B □T E I H 2 B5 G F G5 J5 Stroke adjusting range Z5 G 2-O Connection port N N FH FT FR FS φV J 4-φFP FQ W (width across flats) FF FE Code □V5 I5 (width across flats) K FD FG K5 FG FD FB5MAX. FC5+Stroke FB FA5+Stroke A5 B B5 C5 E F G G5 H I I5 J J5 K K5 40 238 49 82 107 34 15 31 14 21 22 19 8 12 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 50 249 57 85 107 42 15 31 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 63 252 57 85 110 42 15 32 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 80 296 75 91 130 54 21 36 22 37 32 30 13 19 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 100 296 75 91 130 54 21 36 22 37 36 30 14 19 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 Bore size Code N O S T V V5 W Z5 FA5 FB FB5 FC5 FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 40 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 8 14 10 133 59 92 87 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 11 17 10 137 67 95 87 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 11 17 10 144 67 95 90 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 14 21 12 172 88 104 104 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 14 26 12 180 88 104 104 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size 9 60 Dimensions of Pull Side Stroke Adjusting Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × BE BF □T I -3 Stroke ua ir e DDAE A5+Stroke C5+Stroke B BA BB N H B5 G5 J5 Stroke adjusting range Z5 G G N 2-O Connection port φV BD BC J □V5 I5 (width across flats) K 4‐φBP Code 5 W (width across flats) A5 B B5 C5 G G5 H I I5 J J5 K K5 40 238 49 82 107 31 14 21 22 19 8 12 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 50 249 57 85 107 31 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 63 252 57 85 110 32 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 80 296 75 91 130 36 22 37 32 30 13 19 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 100 296 75 91 130 36 22 37 36 30 14 19 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 Bore size Code O T V V5 W Z5 BA BB BC BD BE BF BP 40 18 Rc1/4 37 16 8 14 10 39 10 52 36 84 70 7 50 18 Rc3/8 47 20 11 17 10 47 10 65 47 104 86 9 63 18 Rc3/8 56 20 11 17 10 47 10 76 56 116 98 9 80 20 Rc1/2 70 25 14 21 12 59 16 95 70 143 119 12 100 20 Rc1/2 84 30 14 26 12 59 16 115 84 162 138 12 N pn e Bore size 61 K5 Dimensions of Pull Side Stroke Adjusting Trunnion Type (Unit mm) DDAE Bore size × EE ua ir e A5+Stroke EB EG -11 Stroke C5+Stroke B EG EA+ □S □T F E I ER N N 2-O Connection port φV φD ED EC G5 J5 Stroke adjusting range Z5 G ET J φEPe9 B5 +60MAX. G 2 H Stroke 2 □V5 K5 I5 (width across flats) K W (width across flats) Code A5 B 40 238 49 50 249 57 63 252 57 80 296 75 100 296 75 Bore size Code B5 C5 D E F G G5 H I I5 J J5 K K5 82 107 32 34 15 31 14 21 22 19 8 12 M14×1.5 M12×1.25 85 107 38 42 15 31 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 85 110 38 42 15 32 14 29 27 24 11 15 M18×1.5 M16×1.5 91 130 44 54 21 36 22 37 32 30 13 19 M22×1.5 M20×1.5 91 130 50 54 21 36 22 37 36 30 14 19 M26×1.5 M20×1.5 N O S T V V5 W Z5 EA EB EC ED EE EG EP ER ET 40 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 8 14 10 95.5 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 50 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 11 17 10 103.5 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 63 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 11 17 10 105 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 80 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 14 21 12 129 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 100 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 14 26 12 129 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 Bore size ●With Supporting Bracket DDAE Stroke pn e Bore size × HD HJ HI HR HT φEPe9/H9 HQ -11-11T 4‐φHP HF HB HE Code HA HA HB HD HE HF HI HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size 62 Symbol Specifications ua ir e NEW DYNA Low Hydraulic Cylinders Bore size mm Item 32 40 63 50 80 100 Double acting type Operating method Turbine oil with antifoaming agent (ISO VG22∼100 or equivalent) or petroleum-based hydraulic oil Media Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type, Trunnion type Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.2∼1.0 {2.0∼10.2} MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range Operating speed range Cushion Port size 1.5 {15.3} °C 0∼60 1∼150 None mm/s Rc 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Bore Size and Stroke mm Bore Maximum potential manufacturing stroke Standard stroke size 32 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 700 40 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 1000 50 800 1500 63 80 800, 900, 1000 pn e 100 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 Remarks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 , strokes of 251∼1000 are +1.5, and +0 +0 strokes of 1001 or more are +2.0 +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p.104. 1500 Order Code DDA 50× 100 Bore size × Stroke − − − − Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Types of bellows Lead wire length JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) Applicable to JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) ZC,CS□T type JK Cornex (∼200˚C) A : 1000mm JA Arumix (∼250˚C) B : 3000mm ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for Mounting type Blank Basic type cylinder use. 1 Foot mounting type Rod end mounting Cylinder specification 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type Blank Without rod end mounting H Low hydraulic cylinders 3 Rod side flange mounting type Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) HJ Low hydraulic cylinders with bellows 5 Head side flange mounting type I With I type knuckle 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) ●Orders for rod end mountings only are also accepted. 8 Pivot mounting type ●For rod end mountings dimensions, see p.105. NEW DYNA Cylinders 11 Trunnion type Basic model 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. 63 ( ) !8 ua ir e Inner Construction and Major Parts !7 !0 !3 !4 y !1 r !6 e w q u !5 o i !6 t !2 Major Parts and Materials Parts No. q q Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Head cover y y Rod bushing u u Piston i i Wear ring o o Magnet Seals No. !0 !0 Plug Carbon steel for machine structural use !1 !1 Tie rod nut R Carbon steel for machine structural use !2 !2 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel Aluminum die-cast !3 !3 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use Quantity Bore size mm 32 40 50 63 80 100 Materials Parts Carbon steel for machine structural use Rolled steel for general structural use Aluminum die-cast !4 !4 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy !5 !5 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum alloy !6 !6 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Plastic !7 !7 Snap ring Rubber magnet !8 Plug gasket Spring steel Synthetic rubber (NBR) Rod seal Piston seal Tube gasket 2 1 2 2 NHU-12 NHU-16 NHU-20 NHU-20 NHU-25 NHU-30 OSD-32A 1.5×32 S5 OSD-40A 1.5×40 S5 OSD-50A 1.5×50 S6 OSD-63A 1.5×63 S6 OSD-80A 1.5×80 S6 OSD-100A 1.5×100 S6 pn e Parts Materials Aluminum alloy Plug gasket Mass Bore size mm Basic type Foot mounting type kg Additional mass for Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] Trunnion type each 1mm stroke ZC□□□ Clevis mounting type CS□F 〔with supporting bracket〕Pivot mounting type Trunnion type 〔with supporting bracket〕 Mass at zero stroke Axis right angled Clevis mounting type foot mounting type Flange mounting type 〔with pin〕 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.22 0.16 0.27 0.16 32 0.57 0.68 0.71 0.77 0.76 1.22 0.69 0.87 1.09 0.00218 40 0.65 0.78 0.85 1.02 0.92 1.62 0.83 1.13 1.63 0.00300 50 1.02 1.19 1.34 1.41 1.41 2.11 1.28 1.57 2.07 0.00428 0.34 0.21 63 1.36 1.59 1.88 1.89 1.84 3.54 1.78 2.06 2.56 0.00515 0.34 0.21 80 2.32 2.70 3.17 3.92 3.24 3.96 3.40 3.48 4.20 0.00834 0.87 0.62 100 2.94 3.41 4.22 5.16 4.18 4.90 4.33 4.47 5.19 0.01061 1.47 1.24 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke 1.19+(0.00428×100)=1.618kg 64 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) DDAH 32× Stroke 16 16 ua ir e 2‐Rc1/ 8 Connection port 10(width across flats) 7 3 M10×1.25 2‐Plugs 25.5 25.5 φ26 φ12 φ26 4×2‐M6×1Depth14 6 17 □33 15 31 31 93+Stroke 142+Stroke 47 □44 DDAH 2 19 32 Bore size × 2 Stroke 2‐O Connection port N N Q W(width across flats) Q M M K 2‐Plugs P P φD φV φD pn e 4×2‐L J I □T □S E G B G C+Stroke A+Stroke R A B C D E F G H I J K 40 144 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M 6×1 Depth 14 50 152 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M 6×1 Depth 14 63 155 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M 8×1.25 Depth 14 80 185 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 185 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 Bore size Code L M N O P Q R S T V W Y 40 4 18 Rc1/4 25.5 10 2 50 37 16 14 2.5 50 7 18 Rc3/8 24 12 2 62 47 20 17 3 63 8 18 Rc3/8 25 12 2 75 56 20 17 3 80 11 20 Rc1/2 29 16 2 94 70 25 21 3 100 12 20 Rc1/2 29 18 2 112 84 30 26 3 Bore size 65 Code 2 F H Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAH Bore size × -1 Stroke A+Stroke □S B □T C+Stroke F G R G 2-O Connection port ua ir e E I H 2 N N AH AT AP2 AS AP1 φV J K W (width across flats) View from Z AD AF AG AG AB AE AD AC+Stroke AA+Stroke Z Code A B 32 142 47 40 144 49 50 152 57 63 155 57 80 185 75 100 185 75 Bore size Bore size Code AA 32 153 40 165 50 173 63 184 80 200 100 200 C E F G H I J K N O R S T V W 93 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 44 33 12 10 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 26.5 134 9.5 50 33 20.5 28 9 11 50 3.2 25.5 140 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 149 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 158 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 168 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 168 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAH Bore size × Stroke -2 A+Stroke B □S pn e FS FH FT FR 2 H R 2-O Connection port G N G N J φV I C+Stroke F E □T K W (width across flats) 4‐φFP FQ FF FG FD FG FA+Stroke FE Code FD FC+Stroke FB A B C E F G H I J K N O R S T V W 32 142 47 93 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 44 33 12 10 40 144 49 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 50 152 57 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 63 155 57 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 80 185 75 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 100 185 75 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 Bore size Code FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 32 119 57 73 23 81 63 14 22 9 54 14 44 8 40 119 59 73 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 123 67 73 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 130 67 76 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 150 88 82 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 158 88 82 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size 9 66 Dimensions of Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAH Bore size × -3 Stroke A+Stroke BE B □T BA C+Stroke R ua ir e BF BB G G 2-O Connection port N I H N φD φV BC BD J K W (width across flats) 4‐φBP Code 5 A B C D G H I J K N O R T V W 32 142 47 93 26 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 33 12 10 40 144 49 93 32 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 37 16 14 50 152 57 93 38 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 47 20 17 63 155 57 96 38 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 56 20 17 80 185 75 108 44 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 70 25 21 100 185 75 108 50 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 84 30 26 Bore size Bore size Code BA 32 37 40 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 47 33 72 58 7 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 Dimensions of Head Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDAH Bore size × -5 Stroke BE BG+Stroke pn e BF B □S E □T G 2 H I C+Stroke F N BB 2-O Connection port G N φV φD BC BD J K W (width across flats) 4‐φBP B C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 Code BB BC BD BE BF BG BP 32 10 47 33 72 58 150 7 40 10 52 36 84 70 152 7 50 10 65 47 104 86 160 9 63 10 76 56 116 98 163 9 80 16 95 70 143 119 199 12 100 16 115 84 162 138 199 12 Bore size 67 Code 32 Bore size Dimensions of Clevis Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -7 Stroke ua ir e DDAH CA+Stroke □S CB+Stroke B C+Stroke F E 2 H 2-O Connection port G N PA1 □T CC G +0.7 CT CP+0.5 CT N J I (width across flats) CF 8 9/f EH φC φV φD CJ CD K W (width across flats) Code B C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 32 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 Bore size Bore size Code CA 32 172 40 174 50 184 63 187 80 236 100 236 CB CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 159 19 R15 12 R17 13 16 8.5 46 161 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 169 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 172 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 ●With Supporting Bracket DDAH Bore size × Stroke -7-7C GH GC Code GG GH 4‐φGP GF GD GJ GI GB GT pn e GA+Stroke GE GA GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GJ GP GT 32 215.5 56.5 12.5 63 85 65 40 11.5 57 35 9(Thru hole) 8 40 227.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 11(Thru hole) 8 50 235.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 11(Thru hole) 8 63 238.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 11(Thru hole) 8 80 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 14(Thru hole) 12 100 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 14(Thru hole) 12 Bore size GI 68 Dimensions of Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -8 Stroke ua ir e DDAH DA+Stroke DB+Stroke B E F 2 H DJ C+Stroke 2-O Connection port G N □S □T DC G DQ N J I (width across flats) DF φV φD φDEH9 DD K W (width across flats) Code B C D E F G H I J K N O S T V W 32 47 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 44 33 12 10 40 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 50 37 16 14 50 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 62 47 20 17 63 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 75 56 20 17 80 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 94 70 25 21 100 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 112 84 30 26 Bore size Bore size Code DA 172 40 175 50 183 63 186 80 236 100 235 69 DQ DB DC DD DE DF DJ 159 19 R16 12 R16 13 16 161 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 169 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 172 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 215 32 R24 20 R25 21 32 215 32 R24 20 R26 20 32 pn e 32 0 - 0.070 0 - 0.084 0 - 0.084 0 - 0.084 0 -0.100 0 -0.100 Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -11 Stroke ua ir e DDAH A+Stroke EB EG EE EG B C+Stroke R EA+ Stroke 2 □S □T E I H F 2-O Connection port ET G 2 N G N J φD φV φD EC ED φEPe9 ER K W (width across flats) Code A B 32 142 47 40 144 49 50 152 57 63 155 57 80 185 75 100 185 75 Bore size Bore size Code EA 32 93.5 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 C D E F G H I J K N O R S T V W 93 26 32 15 31 19 17 6 M10×1.25 16 Rc1/8 2 44 33 12 10 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 Rc1/4 2 50 37 16 14 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 62 47 20 17 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 Rc3/8 2 75 56 20 17 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 94 70 25 21 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 Rc1/2 2 112 84 30 26 ET ER EB EC ED EE EG EP 87 53 20 55 16 16 R1 30 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 Bore size × Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDAH HD HR HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 HQ -11-11T HF HB 4‐φHP HE Code HA HP HA HB HD HE HI HJ HQ HR HT EP 32 81 60 R16 85 70 66.5 40 9(Thru hole) 15 1 12 16 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 14 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 14 (Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size HF 70 Symbol Specifications Bore size and Stroke Bore size mm Item ua ir e NEW DYNA Valpack Cylinders 40 50 63 80 mm 100 Bore Double acting type Operating method Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type, Trunnion type Mounting type Operating pressure range MPa{kgf/cm2} Operating temperature range 1.05 {10.7} °C Speed controller Lubrication 16 50∼300 20 25 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine oil Class 1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Port size Rc 3/8 Solenoid Valve Specifications Series Solenoid specifications Item Type 350series Effective area [Cv] Port size mm2 Rc Single Operating pressure range MPa{kgf/cm2} MPa{kgf/cm2} Current At rated voltage applied 26.5[1.47] ( 1/4 0.17∼0.7 {1.7∼7.1} 90 Any Mounting direction 5 Maximum operating frequency c/s AC200V ) Frequency Hz 50 60 50 60 Starting mA(r.m.s.) 34 32 17 16 − Energizing mA(r.m.s.) 22 20 11 10 65(1.6W) 4 Insulation resistance Surge suppression 50× 100 − Bore size × Stroke Blank J Without bellows With bellows Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Tube material Blank Standard FT Steel tube specification Not available for cylinder with magnet. NEW DYNA Valpack cylinders ( 71 ) − − − − AC100V Voltage AC100V AC200V DC24V ●Single unit valve order code VP350-4E1-70-Voltage ●2 pcs. standard speed controllers are included. − 2 4 Min. 100 MΩ Grommet type: 300mm Wiring and lead wire length Color of lead wire 21.6∼26.4 (24±10%) B type Yellow Red(+),Black(−) White Built-in varistor (made to order) Order Code DDV DC24V Built-in flywheel diode for surge suppression 180∼264 (200 +32 -10%) Insulation type 5∼50 G AC100V 90∼132 (100 +30 -10 %) Maximum allowable leakage current mA 1.1 {10.2} Operating temperature range °C Shock resistance 1500 Shading type Operating voltage range V pn e Proof pressure Rated voltage Type VP350-4E1-70 Not required Lubrication 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 Item 2 positions, 5 ports Number of postions and ports 80 Solenoid Specifications Indirect operation Operating method 50Note 1, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 +1 50∼500 mm 63 Remarks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +0 , strokes of 251∼1000 are +1.5 +2.0 +0 , and strokes of 1001 or more are +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. Cylinders with magnet are not available in steel tube specifications. 4. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p. 104. Note: 1. Not available for trunnion type. Exhaust throttle valve (two-way) is standard equipment Cushion stroke 1000 100 5∼50 Operating speed range mm/s 40 50Note 1, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 50 0.17∼0.7 {1.7∼7.1} MPa{kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Standard stroke sizer Air Media Maximum potential manufacturing stroke − Lead wire length A 1000mm B 3000mm Flywheel diode (standard equipment) Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p.97, while for mountings, see p.101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Mounting type Blank Basic type 1 Foot mounting type 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type 3 Rod side flange mounting type 5 Head side flange mounting type 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) Rod end mounting 8 Pivot mounting type Blank Without rod end mounting 11 Trunnion type Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) I With I type knuckle ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. the exception of the trunnion type. ●Orders for rod end mounting only are also accepted. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. ●For rod end mounting dimensions, see p.105. Remarks: 1. The order code for the valpack valve only is VP350-4E1-70-Voltage. 2. For made to order valves, or for double solenoid, 3-position, locking type manual override, plug connector, DIN connector, or LED indicator, consult us. Inner Construction and Major Parts 5-port solenoid valve(VP350-4E1-70) !5 !6 y !3 r u @0 !8 @2 ua ir e !2 !9 !1 @3 @1 e w q i !7 !0 o @0 !8 t !4 Switching from Push to Pull Type Cylinder in Energizing Seals Parts Rod Piston Cushion Tube Cushion Seal Seal Seal gasket gasket 1★ 1★ 2 2★ 2 S5 Bore size mmQuantity 40 DRP16 PWP40N CPF20 1.5×40 50 DRP20 PWP50N CPF24 1.5×50 S6 63 DRP20 PWP63N CPF24 1.5×63 S6 80 DRP25 PWP80N CPF30 1.5×80 S6 100 DRP30 PWP100N CPF35 1.5×100 S6 Push type cylinder in energizing Pull type cylinder in energizing Solenoid Solenoid Remark: Starred ★ designate items available as repair kits. Order code For standard cylinders…SRK-NDDA Bore size Remove the valve mounting screws, turn the valve 180˚, and re-assemble. At this time, confirm that the valve adapter gasket is in the designated position between the valve and the valve adapter. Major Parts and Materials No. Materials No. Aluminum alloy, and steel tube specifications are high carbon steel !7 !7 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) φ32:Stainless steel, φ40∼φ125:Carbon steel for machine structural use !8 !8 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Carbon steel for machine structural use !9 !9 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @0 @0 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Aluminum die-cast @1 @1 Valve adapter Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy @2 @2 Bypass tube Keep ring Aluminum alloy @3 @3 Valve adapter gasket i i Piston Aluminum alloy ― Foot bracket o o Wear ring Plastic ― Axial right angled foot bracket !0 !0 Magnet Rubber magnet ― Flange mounting bracket Rolled steel for general structural use !1 !1 Cushion needle Carbon steel for machine structural use ― Clevis mounting bracket Cast iron !2 !2 Snap ring Spring steel ― Clevis supporting bracket Cast iron !3 !3 Tie rod nut R Rolled steel for general structural use ― Pivot bracket Cast iron !4 !4 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel ― Trunnion bracket Cast iron !5 !5 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use ― Trunnion supporting bracket Cast iron !6 !6 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) ― Knuckles Cast iron Parts Cylinder tube w w Piston rod e e Tie rod r r Rod cover t t Head cover y y Rod bushing u u pn e q q Parts Materials Aluminum alloy Nylon tube Synthetic rubber (NBR) Rolled steel for general structural use Cast iron Mass kg Additional mass for Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] Trunnion type each 1mm stroke ZC□□□ Clevis mounting type Pivot mounting type Trunnion type CS□F 〔with supporting bracket〕 〔with supporting bracket〕 CS□T Note Mass at zero stroke Bore size Axis right angled Flange mounting type Clevis mounting type mm Basic type Foot mounting type foot mounting type 〔with pin〕 40 50 63 80 100 0.89 (0.93) 1.26 (1.32) 1.61 (1.69) 2.15 (2.32) 3.22 (3.43) 1.02 (1.06) 1.43 (1.49) 1.84 (1.92) 2.53 (2.70) 3.69 (3.90) 1.09 (1.13) 1.58 (1.64) 2.13 (2.21) 3.00 (3.17) 4.50 (4.71) 1.26 (1.30) 1.65 (1.71) 2.14 (2.22) 3.75 (3.92) 5.44 (5.65) 1.16 (1.20) 1.65 (1.71) 2.09 (2.17) 3.07 (3.24) 4.46 (4.67) 1.86 (1.90) 2.35 (2.41) 2.79 (2.87) 3.79 (3.96) 5.18 (5.39) 1.07 (1.11) 1.52 (1.58) 2.03 (2.11) 3.23 (3.40) 4.61 (4.82) 1.37 (1.41) 1.81 (1.87) 2.31 (2.39) 3.31 (3.48) 4.75 (4.96) 1.87 (1.91) 2.31 (2.37) 2.81 (2.89) 4.03 (4.20) 5.47 (5.68) 0.00300 (0.0073) 0.00428 (0.01068) 0.00515 (0.01285) 0.00834 (0.02134) 0.01061 (0.02701) 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 1.43+(0.00428×100)=1.858kg 72 Dimensions of Basic Type (Unit mm) DDV Bore size × 45 MAX. Q ua ir e 35 Stroke (300) P 2-Cushion needle A7+Stroke 110.2 9 101.2 (45 MAX.) 35 QA 10.5 25.5 2 35 23 2 18.5 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) SV 12 W (width across flats) K Rc3/8 8-L Both sides φD Q φV N I J □T H □S Y P E F G G C+Stroke B R A+Stroke Bore size Code A 40 144 50 152 63 155 80 185 100 185 Code A7 B C D E F G H I J K 149.5 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 157.5 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 160.5 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 188.5 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 188.5 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 N P Q QA R S SV T V W Y 18 25.5 10 4 2 50 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 50 M6×1 Depth 14 Depth 14 18 24 12 7 2 62 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 63 18 25 12 8 2 75 (99) 56 20 17 3 80 M8×1.25 Depth 14 M10×1.5 Depth 15 20 29 16 11 2 94 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 100 M10×1.5 Depth 15 20 29 18 12 2 112 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 Bore size L M6×1 pn e 40 73 Dimensions of Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) A7+Stroke DDV Bore size × -1 Stroke 110.2 101.2 (45 MAX.) 9 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) ua ir e 35 18.5 10.5 25.5 2 F E 12 35 23 2 QA SV H AP1 J Rc3/8 N View from Z Q φV AS AH AT AP2 □T R I AD K AF AE Y AG AG AD P AB B W (width across flats) G G C+Stroke Z AC+Stroke AA+Stroke Code A7 B 40 149.5 49 50 157.5 57 63 160.5 57 80 188.5 75 100 188.5 75 Bore size Bore size Code AA 40 165 50 173 63 184 80 200 100 200 C E F G H I J K N P Q QA T V W Y 93 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 2 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 93 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 2 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 96 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 2 (99) 56 20 17 3 108 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 2 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 108 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 2 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 SV R AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AP1 AP2 AS AT 25.5 140 12.5 57 36 23.5 30 11 13 55 3.2 29 149 12 68 47 28 36.5 11 13 67.5 3.2 26 158 13 80 56 31 41 11 13 78.5 3.2 45 168 16 97 70 30 49 14 16 96 4 45 168 16 112 84 30 57 14 16 113 4 Dimensions of Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) A7+Stroke DDV Bore size × -2 Stroke 110.2 9 101.2 (45 MAX.) pn e 35 18.5 10.5 25.5 2 QA 2 23 B F E 12 35 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) SV H Q φV R K 4-φFP I Rc3/8 N FH FR FT FS □T J Y W (width across flats) FQ P FD FG FF FE Code FG FD FC+Stroke FB FA+Stroke A7 B E F H I J K N P Q QA T V W Y 40 149.5 49 34 15 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 2 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 50 157.5 57 42 15 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 2 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 63 160.5 57 42 15 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 2 (99) 56 20 17 3 80 188.5 75 54 21 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 2 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 100 188.5 75 54 21 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 2 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 Bore size Code SV R FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FP FQ FR FS FT 40 119 59 73 23 92 70 14 25 12 58 16 50 8 50 123 67 73 25 105 83 14 31 12 68 17 62 9 63 130 67 76 27 117 95 14 38 12 84 22 75.5 80 150 88 82 34 147 121 18 47 14 104 28 94 13 100 158 88 82 38 168 140 18 57 14 120 30 113 14 Bore size 9 74 Dimensions of Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) A7+Stroke DDV Bore size × -3 Stroke 110.2 9 101.2 (45 MAX.) QA 10.5 25.5 2 W (width across flats) SV K 12 35 23 2 18.5 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) ua ir e 35 Rc3/8 4-φBP I φD Q φV BC BD N J Y 5 P H □T BB BA BF G G C+Stroke B BE R A+Stroke Code A A7 40 144 149.5 50 152 157.5 63 155 160.5 80 185 188.5 100 185 188.5 Bore size Bore size Code BA 40 39 50 47 63 47 80 59 100 59 B C D G H I J K N P Q QA T V W Y 49 93 32 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 2 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 57 93 38 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 2 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 57 96 38 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 2 (99) 56 20 17 3 75 108 44 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 2 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 75 108 50 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 2 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 SV R BB BC BD BE BF BP 10 52 36 84 70 7 10 65 47 104 86 9 10 76 56 116 98 9 16 95 70 143 119 12 16 115 84 162 138 12 Dimensions of Head Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) A7+Stroke DDV Bore size × -5 Stroke 110.2 9 101.2 25.5 2 10.5 W (width across flats) 4-φBP I Q J Y P H □T □S E F G G C+Stroke B BF A7 B C D E F G H I J K N P Q QA T V W Y 40 149.5 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 50 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 50 157.5 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 62 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 63 160.5 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 75 (99) 56 20 17 3 80 188.5 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 94 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 100 188.5 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 112 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 Bore size Code S SV BB BC BD BE BF BG BP 40 10 52 36 84 70 152 7 50 10 65 47 104 86 160 9 63 10 76 56 116 98 163 9 80 16 95 70 143 119 199 12 100 16 115 84 162 138 199 12 Bore size 75 BB BG+Stroke BE Code Rc3/8 N φV φD BC BD SV K 12 35 QA 23 pn e 18.5 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) 2 (45 MAX.) 35 Dimensions of Clevis Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDV Bore size × Stroke -7 A7+Stroke ua ir e 110.2 101.2 9 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) (45 MAX.) 25.5 35 18.5 QA 2 35 23 2 10.5 Rc3/8 CF φD E φC Q φV φD N SV 12 W (width across flats) K /f8 H9 CD I (width across flats) CT J Y H P E F □T G G C+Stroke B CT CP+0.7 +0.5 PA1 CC □S CJ CB+Stroke CA+Stroke Code A7 B 40 149.5 49 50 157.5 57 63 160.5 57 80 188.5 75 100 188.5 75 Bore size Bore size Code CA 40 174 50 184 63 187 80 236 100 236 C D E F G H I J K N P Q QA T V W Y 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 50 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 62 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 75 (99) 56 20 17 3 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 94 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 112 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 S SV CB CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 161 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 169 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 172 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 215 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 GF 4‐φGP Bore size × -7-7C Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDV GA+Stroke Code GH GC GG GH GD GJ GT GI GB GE GA GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GI GJ GP GT 40 227.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 11(Thru hole) 8 50 235.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 11(Thru hole) 8 63 238.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 11(Thru hole) 8 80 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 14(Thru hole) 12 100 301.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 14(Thru hole) 12 Bore size 76 Dimensions of Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDV Bore size × Stroke -8 A7+Stroke ua ir e 110.2 101.2 9 (45 MAX.) 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) 35 25.5 18.5 QA 2 35 23 2 10.5 Rc3/8 DF EH φD 9 DD Q φV φD N SV 12 W (width across flats) K I (width across flats) J Y DQ H P □T E F □S G G C+Stroke B DC DJ DB+Stroke DA+Stroke Code A7 B 40 149.5 49 50 157.5 57 63 160.5 57 80 188.5 75 100 188.5 75 Bore size Bore size Code DA 175 50 183 63 186 80 236 100 235 D E F G H I J K N P Q QA T V W Y 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 50 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 62 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 75 (99) 56 20 17 3 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 94 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 112 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 77 S SV DQ DB DC DD DE DF DJ 161 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 169 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 172 19 R17 14 R17 14 20 215 32 R24 20 R25 21 32 215 32 R24 20 R26 20 32 pn e 40 C 0 -0.084 0 -0.084 0 -0.084 0 -0.100 0 -0.100 Dimensions of Trunnion Type (Unit mm) DDV Bore size × -11 Stroke A7+Stroke ua ir e 110.2 101.2 (45 MAX.) QA 2 Stroke 2 ET W (width across flats) K SV ER 25.5 12 35 EA+ 10.5 23 18.5 9 40 2-RC1/4 (with speed controller) 2 35 Rc3/8 Q I J □T H □S EG Y P E EE F G G C+Stroke B EG R A+Stroke EB Code φD EC φV ED φEPe9 N C D E F G H I J K N P Q QA R S T V W Y 40 144 149.5 49 93 32 34 15 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 18 25.5 10 4 2 50 (86.5) 37 16 14 2.5 50 152 157.5 57 93 38 42 15 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 24 12 7 2 62 (92.5) 47 20 17 3 63 155 160.5 57 96 38 42 15 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 18 25 12 8 2 75 (99) 56 20 17 3 80 185 188.5 75 108 44 54 21 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 20 29 16 11 2 94 (108.5) 70 25 21 3 100 185 188.5 75 108 50 54 21 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 20 29 18 12 2 112 (117.5) 84 30 26 3 Bore size Bore size Code A7 A EA 40 95.5 50 103.5 63 105 80 129 100 129 B SV EB EC ED EE EG EP ER ET 113 60 30 63 25 25 R1.6 30 126 72 30 76 25 25 R1.6 30 138 87 40 88 25 25 R1.6 30 164 105 40 114 25 25 R1.6 35 182 129 44 132 25 25 R2 40 ●With Supporting Bracket DDV Stroke pn e Bore size × HD HR HT HJ HI φEPe9/H9 HQ -11-11T Code HB 4-φHP HF HE HA HA HB HD HE HF HJ HP HQ HR HT EP 40 111 80 R22 109 86 80 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 50 111 80 R22 122 99 86 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 63 111 80 R22 134 111 93.5 50 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 80 121 85 R22 160 137 122.5 70 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 100 121 85 R22 178 155 134.5 70 12(Thru hole) 23 2 14 25 Bore size HI 78 NEW DYNA End Keep Cylinders Symbol ua ir e Head Side End Keep, Rod Side End Keep ●Head side end keep Specifications ●Rod side end keep Bore size mm Item Operating method 40 50 63 80 100 Double acting type, with head side or rod side end keep mechanism Media Air Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type, Trunnion type Operating pressure range MPa {kgf/cm2} 0.15∼1.0 {1.5∼10.2} MPa {kgf/cm2} Proof pressure Operating temperature range Operating speed range Cushion 1.5 {15.3} °C ―10∼70 (Freezing not allowed, with sensor, is 0∼60.) mm/s 30∼700 Variable cushion at both ends of stroke Cushion stroke mm Lubrication 16 20 25 Not required (But if you must use lubrication, use Turbine oil Class 1〔ISO VG32〕or equivalent) Maximum holding force (at end keep) Backlash (at end keep) Port size N 880 1374 mm 2182 1.0 MAX Rc 1/4 3519 5498 1.0 MAX 3/8 1/2 Bore Size and Stroke mm Bore Standard stroke Maximum potential manufacturing stroke 40 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000 sizer 50 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 80 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 1500 pn e 63 Remarks : 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 +0 , strokes of 251∼1000 +2.0 are +1.5 +0 , and strokes of 1001 or more are +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. Cylinders with magnet are not available in steel tube specification. 4. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p. 104. 100 Order Code DDA 50 × 100 − − Bore size × Stroke Non-ion specification Blank Standard NCU Non-ion specification Cylinder specification K End keep cylinder JK End keep cylinder with bellows Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. NEW DYNA Cylinders Basic model 79 − − − End keep position HL Head side end keep RL Rod side end keep − − Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Sensor switch Lead wire length ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V Applicable to ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V ZC,CS□T type CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V A : 1000mm AC85∼115V B : 3000mm CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V Mounting type CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V Blank Basic type ●For sensor switch specifications, see p. 97, while for mountings, see p. 101. 1 Foot mounting type ●Cylinders with magnet are not available in steel tube specification. 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. 3 Rod side flange mounting type ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. 5 Head side flange mounting type Rod end mounting 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) Blank Without rod end mounting 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) 8 Pivot mounting type I With I type knuckle 11 Trunnion type ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) ●Orders for rod end mounting only are also accepted. ●Mounting brackets are included at time of delivery, with the exception of ●For rod end mounting dimensions, see p. 105. the trunnion type. ●Orders for mounting brackets only are also accepted. Tube material Blank Standard (Aluminum tube) FT Steel tube specification Not available for cylinder with magnet. ( ) ( ) Inner Construction and Major Parts ua ir e ●Head side end keep Cross section !1 @4 !2 @0 w @1 u !3 r y @5 @3 q e @7 i @2 !0 o t !5 !7 !6 !8 @8 @6 !9 !4 ●Rod side end keep Cross section (locked) o @1 !0 !7 w !8 !2 @3 !6 !4 !3 !5 @4 r @2 @0 e q y !9 i u t !1 Major Parts and Materials ●Head side end keep Parts No. Cylinder tube Materials No. Aluminum alloy q q Cylinder tube pn e q q ●Rod side end keep Parts Materials Aluminum alloy w w Piston rod Carbon steel for machine structural use w w Piston rod Carbon steel for machine structural use e e Tie rod Carbon steel for machine structural use e e Tie rod Carbon steel for machine structural use r r Rod cover Aluminum die-cast r r Rod cover Aluminum alloy t t Head cover Aluminum alloy t t Head cover Aluminum die-cast y y Keep ring u u Rod bushing i i Piston o o Wear ring !0 !0 Magnet !1 !1 Cushion needle !2 !2 Snap ring !3 !3 Tie rod nut R !4 !4 Tie rod nut H !5 !5 Lock cover !6 !6 Spring !7 !7 Lock piston !8 !8 !9 !9 Aluminum alloy y y Piston Oil-permeated sintered copper alloy u u Wear ring Aluminum alloy i i Magnet Aluminum alloy Plastic Rubber magnet Plastic o o Cushion needle Rubber magnet !0 !0 Snap ring Carbon steel for machine structural use !1 !1 Tie rod nut R Rolled steel for general structural use Spring steel !2 !2 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel Rolled steel for general structural use !3 !3 Lock cover Chrome-molybdenum steel !4 !4 Spring Aluminum alloy !5 !5 Lock piston Carbon steel for machine structural use Spring steel Aluminum alloy Spring steel Aluminum alloy Spring steel !6 !6 Button bolt Aluminum alloy !7 !7 Rod end nut Button bolt Chrome-molybdenum steel !8 !8 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) Lock sleeve Carbon steel for machine structural use !9 !9 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @0 @0 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use @0 @0 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @1 @1 Rod seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @1 @1 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @2 @2 Piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @2 @2 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @3 @3 Cushion seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @3 @3 Lock piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Cushion gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Bumper @5 @5 Tube gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @6 @6 Lock piston seal Synthetic rubber (NBR) @7 @7 Piston gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @8 @8 Bumper Chrome-molybdenum steel Rolled steel for general structural use Urethane rubber Urethane rubber 80 Seals Rod seal Piston seal Cushion seal Tube gasket Cushion gasket Lock piston seal 1 1 2 2 2 1 1Note DRP16 DRP20 DRP20 DRP25 DRP30 PWP40N PWP50N PWP63N PWP80N PWP100N CPF20 CPF24 CPF24 CPF30 CPF35 1.5×40 1.5×50 1.5×63 1.5×80 1.5×100 S5 S6 S6 S6 S6 MYA18 MYA18 MYA18 MYA24 MYA24 S10 S14 S14 S18 S18 Quantity 40 50 63 80 100 Note: Head side end keep only. Mass Piston gasket ua ir e Parts Bore size mm ●Head side end keep Bore size mm Basic type Foot mounting type 0.98 (1.02) 1.55 (1.61) 2.06 (2.14) 3.69 (3.86) 4.83 (5.04) 40 50 63 80 100 1.11 (1.15) 1.72 (1.78) 2.29 (2.37) 4.07 (4.24) 5.30 (5.51) kg Mass at zero stroke Trunnion type Clevis mounting type Axis right angled foot mounting type 1.18 (1.22) 1.87 (1.93) 2.58 (2.66) 4.54 (4.71) 6.11 (6.32) mounting type Flange mounting type Clevis 〔with (with supporting bracket) Pivot mounting type Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) pin〕 1.35 (1.39) 1.94 (2.00) 2.59 (2.67) 5.29 (5.46) 7.05 (7.26) 1.25 (1.29) 1.94 (2.00) 2.54 (2.62) 4.61 (4.78) 6.07 (6.28) 1.95 (1.99) 2.64 (2.70) 3.24 (3.32) 5.33 (5.50) 6.79 (7.00) 1.16 (1.20) 1.81 (1.87) 2.48 (2.56) 4.77 (4.94) 6.22 (6.43) 1.46 (1.50) 2.10 (2.16) 2.76 (2.84) 4.85 (5.02) 6.36 (6.57) Additional mass for Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] each 1mm stroke ZC□□□ CS□F Note CS□T 0.00300 (0.00431) 0.00428 (0.00635) 0.00515 (0.00773) 0.00834 (0.01302) 0.01061 (0.01642) 1.96 (2.00) 2.60 (2.66) 3.26 (3.34) 5.57 (5.74) 7.08 (7.29) 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.04 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 1.72+(0.00428×100)=2.148kg ●Rod side end keep Bore size mm Basic type Foot mounting type 0.94 (0.98) 1.49 (1.55) 2.00 (2.08) 3.58 (3.75) 4.67 (4.88) 40 50 63 80 100 1.07 (1.11) 1.66 (1.72) 2.23 (2.31) 3.96 (4.13) 5.14 (5.35) kg Mass at zero stroke Trunnion type Clevis mounting type Axis right angled foot mounting type 1.14 (1.18) 1.81 (1.87) 2.52 (2.60) 4.43 (4.60) 5.95 (6.16) mounting type Flange mounting type Clevis 〔with (with supporting bracket) Pivot mounting type Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) pin〕 1.31 (1.35) 1.88 (1.94) 2.53 (2.61) 5.18 (5.35) 6.89 (7.10) 1.21 (1.25) 1.88 (1.94) 2.48 (2.56) 4.50 (4.67) 5.91 (6.12) 1.12 (1.16) 1.75 (1.81) 2.42 (2.50) 4.66 (4.83) 6.06 (6.27) 1.91 (1.95) 2.58 (2.64) 3.18 (3.26) 5.22 (5.39) 6.63 (6.84) 1.42 (1.46) 2.04 (2.10) 2.70 (2.78) 4.74 (4.91) 6.20 (6.41) 1.92 (1.96) 2.54 (2.60) 3.20 (3.28) 5.46 (5.63) 6.92 (7.13) Additional mass for Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] each 1mm stroke ZC□□□ Note CS□F CS□T 0.00300 (0.00431) 0.00428 (0.00635) 0.00515 (0.00773) 0.00834 (0.01302) 0.01061 (0.01642) 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.04 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 1.66+(0.00428×100)=2.088kg Dimensions of Head Side End Keep, Basic Type(Unit mm) DDAK Bore size × Stroke -HL 2-O 2.6 φ39 N N9 Q M LB pn e K φ40,φ50 4×2−L 2-Cushion needle P P9 φD φV φD W (width across flats) J 2.6 E □S F G9 G B C9+Stroke R A9+Stroke A9 B C9 D E F G G9 H I J K 40 159 49 108 32 34 15 31 46 21 22 8 M14×1.5 50 172 57 113 38 42 15 31 51 29 27 11 M18×1.5 63 175 57 116 38 42 15 32 52 29 27 11 M18×1.5 80 210 75 133 44 54 21 36 61 37 32 13 M22×1.5 100 210 75 133 50 54 21 36 61 37 36 14 M26×1.5 Bore size Code L M N N9 O P P9 Q R S T V W LB 40 M6×1 Depth 14 4 18 21 Rc1/4 25.5 40.5 10 2 50 37 16 14 8 50 M6×1 Depth 14 7 18 21 Rc3/8 24 44 12 2 62 47 20 17 4 63 M8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 21 Rc3/8 25 45 12 2 75 56 20 17 ― 80 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 24 Rc1/2 29 54 16 2 94 70 25 21 ― 100 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 24 Rc1/2 29 54 18 2 112 84 30 26 ― Bore size 81 Code 2 H I □T Dimensions of Rod Side End Keep, Basic Type (Unit mm) DDAK Bore size × Stroke -RL φ39 N10 N 2.6 ua ir e 2-O Q LB M K φ40,φ50 P10 4×2−L P 2-Cushion needle φD φV φD W (width across flats) J I 2.6 2 H E □T □S F G G10 B C10+Stroke R A10+Stroke Bore size Code A10 40 159 50 172 63 175 80 210 100 210 Code L B C10 D E F G G10 H I J K 49 108 32 34 15 31 46 21 22 8 M14×1.5 57 113 38 42 15 31 51 29 27 11 M18×1.5 57 116 38 42 15 32 52 29 27 11 M18×1.5 75 133 44 54 21 36 61 37 32 13 75 133 50 54 21 36 61 37 36 14 M22×1.5 M26×1.5 M N N10 O P P10 Q R S T V W LB 40 M6×1 Depth 14 4 18 21 Rc1/4 25.5 40.5 10 2 50 37 16 14 8 50 M6×1 Depth 14 7 18 21 Rc3/8 24 44 12 2 62 47 20 17 4 63 M8×1.25 Depth 14 8 18 21 Rc3/8 25 45 12 2 75 56 20 17 ― 80 M10×1.5 Depth 15 11 20 24 Rc1/2 29 54 16 2 94 70 25 21 ― 100 M10×1.5 Depth 15 12 20 24 Rc1/2 29 54 18 2 112 84 30 26 ― pn e Bore size 82 NEW DYNA Cylinders with Brake Symbol Specifications ua ir e Single brake, Double brake Bore size mm Item 40 50 63 80 100 Double acting type Operating method Air Media Mounting type Basic type, Foot mounting type, Axis right angled foot mounting type, Rod side flange mounting type, Head side flange mounting type, Clevis mounting type, Pivot mounting type Operating pressure range MPa{kgf/cm2} 0.1∼1.0 {1.0∼10.2} Proof pressure MPa{kgf/cm2} 1.5 {15.3} Operating temperature range Operating speed range °C 5∼60 50∼300 mm/s Variable cushion at both ends of stroke Cushion Cushion stroke 16 mm 20 25 Required (Turbine oil Class 1 ISO VG32 equivalent) Lubrication Brake release pressure MPa{kgf/cm2} Stopping repeatability Maximum payload N{kgf} 0.35{3.6} 0.4{4.1} 0.35{3.6} Two-way Brake acting direction ±2 mm Single brake 333 {34} 519 {53} 833 {85} 1352 {138} 2107 {215} Double brake 666 {68} 1038 {106} 1666 {170} 2705 {276} 4214 {430} Port size Rc Brake unit connection port 1/4 3/8 Rc 1/2 1/4 3/8 Bore size and Stroke mm Bore Standard stroke Maximum potential manufacturing stroke pn e sizer 40 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000 50 63 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 80 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 1500 Remarks: 1. Stroke tolerance: Strokes of 250 or less are +1 , strokes of 251∼1000 are +1.5, and +0 +0 strokes of 1001 or more are +2.0 +0 . 2. For non-standard strokes, consult us. 3. Cylinders with magnet are not available for heat resitance specification and steel tube specification. 4. For the maximum potential manufacturing stroke with bellows specification, see p. 104. 100 Order Code DDA − 50 × 100 − − Bore size × Stroke Types of bellows JT Nylon tarpaulin (∼80˚C) JC Chloroprene (∼100˚C) JK Cornex (∼200˚C) JA Arumix (∼250˚C) ●Cornex is a registered trademark of Teijin, Inc. ●The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. Cylinder specification R Single brake cylinder RR Double brake cylinder JR Single brake cylinder with bellows JRR Double brake cylinder with bellows 83 − − Sensor switch (for cylinder with magnet) ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V ●For sensor switch specifications, see p. 97, while for mountings, see p. 101. ●CS□F comes with a DIN connector. All others are grommet type. ●Orders for sensor switches only are also accepted. Number of sensor switches 1 With one sensor switch 2 With two sensor switches ⋮ ⋮ n With n sensor switches Lead wire length Applicable to ZC,CS□T type A : 1000mm B : 3000mm ( Rod end mounting Mounting type Blank Without rod end mounting Blank Basic type Y With Y type knuckle (with pin) 1 Foot mounting type I With I type knuckle 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type ●Place separate orders for the cylinder joint and cylinder rod end. 3 Rod side flange mounting type Tube material ●Orders for rod end mounting only are also accepted. Head side flange mounting type Blank Standard (Aluminum tube) 5 ●For rod end mounting dimensions, see p. 105. 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) FT Steel tube specification 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting bracket) Not available for NEW DYNA Cylinders 8 Pivot mounting type cylinder with magnet. Basic model ( ) ) Inner Construction and Major Parts ●Single brake φ40, φ50 ua ir e !8 w !9 u @3 r !6 !2 q y @2 @1 !0 !3 !1 o @4 i @0 t !7 !5 !4 e ●Single brake φ63∼φ100 @1 w @2 @6 o !5 !4 r !9 q y @5 @4 i !6 !3 u @7 !2 !0 !1 t @3 @0 !8 !7 e Major Parts and Materials Note: For the cylinder body, see the NEW DYNA Standard Cylinder. ●Single brake φ40, φ50 Parts No. q q Brake tube w w Piston rod ●Single brake φ63∼φ100 Materials Materials No. Carbon steel for machine structural use q q Brake tube Carbon steel for machine structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use Parts Piston rod Carbon steel for machine structural use e e Brake tie rod Carbon steel for machine structural use Front cover Aluminum alloy r r Front cover Aluminum alloy t t Rear cover Aluminum alloy t t Rear cover Aluminum alloy y y Brake piston Cast iron y y Brake piston u u Spacer S Plastic u u Taper ring i i Brake shoe Phosphor bronze i i Hexagon socket bolt o o Ring High carbon chrome bearing steel o o Spacer S !0 !0 Retainer A High carbon chrome bearing steel !0 !0 Brake shoe !1 !1 Retainer B Carbon steel for machine structural use !1 !1 Ring !2 !2 Spring Piano wire !2 !2 Retainer A High carbon chrome bearing steel !3 !3 Steel ball High carbon chrome bearing steel !3 !3 Retainer B Carbon steel for machine structural use !4 !4 Lock nut Rolled steel for general structural use !4 !4 Spring A !5 !5 Brake lock release screw Chrome-molybdenum steel !5 !5 Spring B Piano wire !6 !6 Filter Chrome-molybdenum steel+plastic !6 !6 Steel ball High carbon chrome bearing steel !7 !7 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel !7 !7 Lock nut Rolled steel for general structural use !8 !8 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use !8 !8 Brake lock release screw !9 !9 Brake rod seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) !9 !9 Filter @0 @0 Brake rod seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @0 @0 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel @1 @1 Brake piston seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @1 @1 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use @2 @2 Brake piston seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @2 @2 Brake rod seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @3 @3 Spacer gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @3 @3 Brake rod seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Rear cover gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Brake piston seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @5 @5 Brake piston seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @6 @6 Spacer gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @7 @7 Rear cover gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) pn e w w Carbon steel for machine structural use e e Brake tie rod r r Cast iron High carbon chrome bearing steel Chrome-molybdenum steel Plastic Phosphor bronze High carbon chrome bearing steel Piano wire Chrome-molybdenum steel Chrome-molybdenum steel+plastic 84 Inner Construction and Major Parts ●Double brake φ40, φ50 ua ir e @0 w @1 @5 !8 r u !4 q y !3 !5 !1 @3 @4 !2 i t @2 !9 e !0 o !6 !7 ●Double brake φ63∼φ100 @3 w @4 @8 r @1 o q !4 y u !5 i !3 !6 @6 @7 t !0 !7 !8 @5 @2 e !2 !1 !9 @0 Major Parts and Materials Note:For the cylinder body, see the NEW DYNA Standard Cylinder. ●Double brake φ40, φ50 Parts No. ●Double brake φ63∼φ100 No. Carbon steel for machine structural use q q Brake tube Carbon steel for machine structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use w w Piston rod Carbon steel for machine structural use Carbon steel for machine structural use e e Brake tie rod Carbon steel for machine structural use Parts q q Brake tube w w Piston rod e e Brake tie rod r r Front cover Aluminum alloy r r Front cover Aluminum alloy t t Rear cover Aluminum alloy t t Rear cover Aluminum alloy y y Brake piston Cast iron y y Brake piston u u Spacer S Plastic u u Taper ring i i Spacer D o o Brake shoe !0 !0 pn e 85 Materials Materials Cast iron High carbon chrome bearing steel Plastic i i Hexagon socket bolt Phosphor bronze o o Spacer S Ring High carbon chrome bearing steel !0 !0 Spacer D !1 !1 Retainer A High carbon chrome bearing steel !1 !1 Brake shoe !2 !2 Retainer B Carbon steel for machine structural use !2 !2 Ring !3 !3 Retainer D Carbon steel for machine structural use !3 !3 Retainer A High carbon chrome bearing steel !4 !4 Spring Piano wire !4 !4 Retainer B Carbon steel for machine structural use !5 !5 Steel ball High carbon chrome bearing steel !5 !5 Retainer D Carbon steel for general structural use !6 !6 Lock nut Rolled steel for general structural use !6 !6 Steel ball High carbon chrome bearing steel !7 !7 Brake lock release screw Chrome-molybdenum steel !7 !7 Spring A Piano wire !8 !8 Filter Chrome-molybdenum steel+plastic !8 !8 Spring B Piano wire !9 !9 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel !9 !9 Lock nut Rolled steel for general structural use @0 @0 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use @0 @0 Brake lock release screw @1 @1 Brake rod seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @1 @1 Filter @2 @2 Brake rod seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @2 @2 Tie rod nut H Chrome-molybdenum steel @3 @3 Brake piston seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @3 @3 Rod end nut Rolled steel for general structural use @4 @4 Brake piston seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @4 @4 Brake rod seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @5 @5 Spacer gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) @5 @5 Brake rod seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @6 @6 Brake piston seal A Synthetic rubber (NBR) @7 @7 Brake piston seal B Synthetic rubber (NBR) @8 @8 Spacer gasket Synthetic rubber (NBR) Chrome-molybdenum steel Plastic Plastic Phosphor bronze High carbon chrome bearing steel Chrome-molybdenum steel Chrome-molybdenum steel+Plastic Seals ●Single brake Rod seal for front cover Rod seal for rear cover Quantity 1 PNU28 P22 G45 50 DRP20 PNU20 PNU53 PNU32 P28 G58 63 DRP20 PNU20 PNU70 GLY35 P28 G75 80 DRP25 PNU25A PNU85 PNU45 P32 G95 100 DRP30 PNU30 PNU115 PNU50 P40 G120 Rod seal for front cover Rod seal for rear cover Piston seal A Piston seal B 1 1 2 2 1 DRP16 PNU16 PNU40 PNU28 P22 DRP20 PNU20 PNU53 PNU32 P28 DRP20 PNU20 PNU70 GLY35 P28 DRP25 PNU25A PNU85 PNU45 P32 DRP30 PNU30 PNU115 PNU50 P40 Quantity 50 63 80 100 Mass Single brake 2.21 (2.25) 3.62 (3.68) 5.68 (5.76) 8.97 (9.14) 14.69 (14.90) Spacer gasket kg Bore size mounting mm Basic type Foot type 100 Rear cover gasket PNU40 40 80 1 PNU16 Parts 63 Spacer gasket 1 DRP16 Bore size mm 50 Piston seal B 1 40 ●Double brake 40 Piston seal A 1 1 ua ir e Parts Bore size mm 2.38 (2.42) 3.85 (3.91) 6.06 (6.14) 9.44 (9.61) 15.25 (15.46) Mass at zero stroke Rod side Head side Clevis mounting type Clevis mounting type Axis right angled 〔with pin〕 〔with supporting bracket〕 foot mounting type flange mounting type flange mounting type 2.51 (2.55) 4.14 (4.20) 6.53 (6.61) 10.25 (10.42) 16.36 (16.57) 2.60 (2.64) 4.15 (4.21) 7.28 (7.36) 11.19 (11.36) 17.56 (17.77) 2.58 (2.62) 4.01 (4.07) 6.21 (6.29) 10.57 (10.74) 16.91 (17.12) 2.48 (2.52) 4.01 (4.07) 6.16 (6.24) 9.89 (10.06) 15.93 (16.14) 3.18 (3.22) 4.71 (4.77) 6.86 (6.94) 10.61 (10.78) 16.65 (16.86) Additional mass for Pivot mounting type each 1mm stroke 2.39 (2.43) 3.88 (3.94) 6.10 (6.18) 10.05 (10.22) 16.08 (16.29) 0.00300 (0.00431) 0.00428 (0.00635) 0.00515 (0.00773) 0.00834 (0.01302) 0.01061 (0.01642) Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] ZC□□□ CS□TNote 0.04 0.04 CS□F 0.05 0.06 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 3.62+(0.00428×100)=4.048kg Double brake kg Mass at zero stroke Rod side Head side Axis right angled Clevis mounting type Clevis mounting type 〔with pin〕 〔with supporting bracket〕 foot mounting type flange mounting type flange mounting type Additional mass for Pivot mounting type each 1mm stroke pn e Bore size mounting mm Basic type Foot type 40 50 63 80 100 3.32 (3.36) 4.44 (4.50) 6.93 (7.01) 11.15 (11.32) 19.32 (19.53) 3.49 (3.53) 4.67 (4.73) 7.31 (7.39) 11.62 (11.79) 19.88 (20.09) 3.62 (3.66) 4.96 (5.02) 7.78 (7.86) 12.43 (12.60) 20.99 (21.20) 3.71 (3.75) 4.97 (5.03) 8.53 (8.61) 13.37 (13.54) 22.19 (22.40) 3.69 (3.73) 4.83 (4.89) 7.46 (7.54) 12.75 (12.92) 21.54 (21.75) 3.59 (3.63) 4.83 (4.89) 7.41 (7.49) 12.07 (12.24) 20.56 (20.79) 4.29 (4.33) 5.53 (5.59) 8.11 (8.19) 12.79 (12.96) 21.28 (21.49) 3.50 (3.54) 4.70 (4.76) 7.35 (7.43) 12.23 (12.40) 20.71 (20.92) 0.00300 (0.00431) 0.00428 (0.00635) 0.00515 (0.00773) 0.00834 (0.01302) 0.01061 (0.01642) Mass of one sensor switch [with holder] ZC□□□ CS□TNote 0.04 0.04 CS□F 0.05 0.06 Mass of knuckle Y type knuckle 〔with pin〕 I type knuckle 0.27 0.16 0.34 0.21 0.34 0.21 0.87 0.62 1.47 1.24 Note: For lead wire length A (1000mm). Calculation example: For a foot mounting type with bore size of 50mm, and a 100mm stroke Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for steel tube specifications. 4.44+(0.00428×100)=4.868kg 86 Dimensions of Single Brake, Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke O11 (Brake release port) N11 N 2‐O (Cylinder port) N M11 Q M ua ir e DDAR When brake lock is released:X1 When brake is activated:X2 or more P P 2-Brake lock release screw W (width across flats) 4‐L11 2‐Cushion needle 4-L φD φV φD11 K J I □T11 H F E □S11 U Z1 Z2 G G C11 B □T □S R C+Stroke A11+Stroke Code A11 B 40 272 49 50 290 57 63 304 63 80 347 75 100 361 75 Bore size Code M M11 40 4 6 50 7 11 63 8 15 80 11 15 100 12 15 C11 D D11 E F G H I J K 93 128 32 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 Depth14 M6×1 93 138 38 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M6×1 Depth14 M8×1.25 Depth14 87 L L11 Depth14 96 143 38 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth14 M10×1.5 Depth15 108 162 44 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth15 M10×1.5 Depth15 108 176 50 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth15 M12×1.75 Depth15 N N11 Q R S S11 T T11 U V W X1 X2 Z1 Z2 18 17 Rc1/4 Rc1/4 25.5 10 2 50 62 37 47 12 16 14 88 94 27 28 18 17 Rc3/8 Rc1/4 24 12 2 62 75 47 56 14 20 17 97 104 30 30 18 22 Rc3/8 Rc1/4 25 12 2 75 94 56 70 15 20 17 114 122 35 35 20 24 Rc1/2 Rc3/8 29 16 2 94 112 70 84 18 25 21 134 142 35 39 20 24 Rc1/2 Rc3/8 29 18 2 112 138 84 104 17 30 26 159 166 36 39 O O11 P pn e Bore size C Dimensions of Single Brake, Foot Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -1 Stroke ua ir e DDAR A11+Stroke □S11 □T11 I C+Stroke C11 B F E Z1 U G Z2 □S R G □T H φV AS3 AH2 AS2 φD11 J AF2 W (width across flats) 4-φAP AD2 AG2 AG2 AD2 AB2 AE2 AT2 AT2 K AF2 AC6+Stroke AE3 AA6+Stroke Code Bore size A11 40 272 50 290 63 304 80 347 100 361 Code B C C11 D11 E F G H I J K 49 93 128 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 57 93 138 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 63 96 143 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 75 108 162 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 75 108 176 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 R S S11 T T11 U V W Z1 Z2 AA6 AB2 AC6 AD2 AE2 AE3 AF2 AP AS2 AS3 AT2 40 2 50 62 37 47 12 16 14 27 28 297 23 273 12 70 60 37 26 41 12 72 66 6 50 2 62 75 47 56 14 20 17 30 30 311 29 287 12 80 70 47 28 48 12 85.5 79 6 63 2 75 94 56 70 15 20 17 35 35 335 29 307 14 97 80 56 34 59 14 106 80 2 94 112 70 84 18 25 21 35 39 366 41 338 14 114 97 70 34 66 14 122 113 8 100 2 112 138 84 104 17 30 26 36 39 406 32 370 18 138 114 84 43 79 14 148 135 10 Bore size AG2 AH2 96.5 8 Dimensions of Single Brake, Axis Right Angled Foot Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -2 Stroke pn e DDAR □S11 □T11 Z1 F E I A11+Stroke C+Stroke C11 B U G Z2 G □S R □T H FS2 FH2 FT2 φV FS3 J FT3 K FF2 FE2 Code FD3 FG2 W (width across flats) 4-φFP2 FG2 FD2 FB2 FF2 FC6+Stroke FE2 FA6+Stroke A11 B C C11 E F G H I J K R 40 272 49 93 128 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 2 50 290 57 93 138 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 2 63 304 63 96 143 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 2 80 347 75 108 162 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 2 100 361 75 108 176 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 2 Bore size Code S S11 T T11 U V W Z1 Z2 FA6 FB2 FC6 FD2 FD3 FE2 FF2 FG2 FH2 FP2 FS2 FS3 FT2 FT3 40 50 62 37 47 12 16 14 27 28 248 59 201 22 25 105 83 14 31 12 56 62 5.5 9 50 62 75 47 56 14 20 17 30 30 262 67 211 24 27 117 95 14 38 12 69 75.5 6.5 9 63 75 94 56 70 15 20 17 35 35 276 76 213 29 34 147 121 18 47 14 84.5 94 8.5 13 80 94 112 70 84 18 25 21 35 39 315 88 244 33 38 168 140 18 57 14 104 113 9.5 14 100 112 138 84 104 17 30 26 36 39 336 89 257 37 42 195 167 18 69 14 125 138 11.5 16 Bore size 88 Dimensions of Single Brake, Rod Side Flange Type (Unit mm) DDAR Bore size × -3 Stroke ua ir e A11+Stroke □T11 I U Z1 4-φBP2 C+Stroke C11 B □S11 G Z2 □S R G □T 4‐L H φD φV BD2 BC2 J K BF2 BE2 Code BA2 W (width across flats) BB2 A11+Stroke B C C11 D G H I J K 40 272 49 93 128 32 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 50 290 57 93 138 38 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 63 304 63 96 143 38 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 80 347 75 108 162 44 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 361 75 108 176 50 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 Bore size Code A11 L R S S11 T T11 U V W Z1 Z2 BA2 BB2 BC2 BD2 BE2 BF2 BP2 40 2 50 62 37 47 12 16 14 27 28 39 10 65 47 104 86 9 50 2 62 75 47 56 14 20 17 30 30 47 10 76 56 116 98 9 63 2 75 94 56 70 15 20 17 35 35 47 16 95 70 143 119 12 80 2 94 112 70 84 18 25 21 35 39 59 16 115 84 162 138 12 100 2 112 138 84 104 17 30 26 36 39 59 16 138 104 196 168 14 Bore size Dimensions of Single Brake, Head Side Flange Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -5 Stroke pn e DDAR □S11 E I 4‐L11 C+Stroke C11 B □T11 Z1 F U Z2 G G H □T 4-φBP BC BD φV φD11 J K W (width across flats) BE B C C11 D11 E F G H I J K 40 49 93 128 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 50 57 93 138 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 63 63 96 143 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 80 75 108 162 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 75 108 176 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Code L11 Depth 14 S11 T T11 U V W Z1 Z2 BB BC BD BE BF BG3 BP 40 62 37 47 12 16 14 27 28 10 52 36 84 70 280 7 50 75 47 56 14 20 17 30 30 10 65 47 104 86 298 9 63 94 56 70 15 20 17 35 35 10 76 56 116 98 312 9 80 112 70 84 18 25 21 35 39 16 95 70 143 119 361 12 100 138 84 104 17 30 26 36 39 16 115 84 162 138 375 12 Bore size 89 Code BF BB BG3+Stroke Dimensions of Single Brake, Clevis Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke -7 ua ir e DDAR □S11 I F E 4‐L11 C+Stroke C11 B □T11 Z1 U Z2 G □S G □T H CF 8 9/f EH φC φV φD11 J CD K CT CC W (width across flats) CA3+Stroke Code CT CP +0.7 +0.5 CJ CB3+Stroke PA1 B C C11 D11 E F G H I J K 40 49 93 128 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 50 57 93 138 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 63 63 96 143 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 80 75 108 162 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 75 108 176 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Bore size Code S S11 40 50 62 50 62 75 63 75 94 80 94 112 100 112 138 L11 Depth 14 T T11 U V W Z1 Z2 CA3 CB3 CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 37 47 12 16 14 27 28 302 289 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 47 56 14 20 17 30 30 322 307 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 56 70 15 20 17 35 35 336 321 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 70 84 18 25 21 35 39 398 377 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 84 104 17 30 26 36 39 412 391 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 Bore size × -7-7C Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDAR GA3+Stroke Code GT GH GC GG GH GF GD GE GK GJ GI GB 4‐φGP GA3 GB GC GD GE GG GH GI GJ GK GP 40 355.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 76 11 (Thru hole) 8 50 373.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 82.5 11 (Thru hole) 8 63 387.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 92 11 (Thru hole) 8 80 463.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 116 14 (Thru hole) 12 100 477.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 129 14 (Thru hole) 12 Bore size GF GT 90 Dimensions of Single Brake, Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke -8 ua ir e DDAR □S11 I E 4‐L11 C+Stroke C11 B □T11 F Z1 U Z2 G □S G □T H DF 9 EH φD φV φD11 J DD K DQ DC W (width across flats) DJ DB3+Stroke DA3+Stroke Code B C C11 D11 E F G H I J K 40 49 93 128 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 50 57 93 138 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 63 63 96 143 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 80 75 108 162 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 75 108 176 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Code T T11 U V W Z1 Z2 DA3 DB3 DC DD DE DF DJ DQ 50 62 37 47 12 16 14 27 28 303 289 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 50 62 75 47 56 14 20 17 30 30 321 307 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 63 75 94 56 70 15 20 17 35 35 335 321 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 80 94 112 70 84 18 25 21 35 39 398 377 32 R24 20 R25 21 0 32 -0.100 100 112 138 84 104 17 30 26 36 39 411 391 32 R24 20 R26 20 0 32 -0.100 pn e S11 91 Depth 14 40 Bore size S L11 Dimensions of Double Brake, Basic Type (Unit mm) Bore size × Stroke N N12 N 2‐O (Cylinder port) Q M ua ir e DDARR When brake lock is released:X1 When brake is activated:X2 or more 4‐L12 P O12 (Brake release port) W (width across flats) P 4-Brake lock release screw 2‐Cushion needle 4‐L φD φD12 φV YT K J I □T H □T12 F E □S12 Z1 U U Z2 G G C12 B □S R C+Stroke A12+Stroke Code A12 B 40 350 49 50 374 57 63 383 63 80 439 75 100 467 75 Bore size Code M N 40 4 18 50 7 18 63 8 18 80 11 20 100 12 20 C12 D D12 E F G H I J K 93 206 32 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 L Depth14 M6×1 93 222 38 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M6×1 Depth14 M8×1.25 Depth14 L12 Depth14 96 222 38 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth14 M10×1.5 Depth15 108 254 44 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth15 M10×1.5 Depth15 108 282 50 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth15 M12×1.75 Depth15 Q R S S12 T T12 U V W X1 X2 YT Z1 Z2 116 N12 Rc1/4 Rc1/4 25.5 O O12 P 10 2 50 62 37 47 12 16 14 88 94 37.5 27 53 124 Rc3/8 Rc1/4 24 12 2 62 75 47 56 14 20 17 97 104 44 30 56 124 Rc3/8 Rc1/4 25 12 2 75 94 56 70 15 20 17 114 122 53.5 35 61 143 Rc1/2 Rc3/8 29 16 2 94 112 70 84 18 25 21 134 142 68.5 35 67 157 Rc1/2 Rc3/8 29 18 2 112 138 84 104 17 30 26 159 166 82 36 68 pn e Bore size C 92 Dimensions of Double Brake, Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDARR Bore size × -1 Stroke ua ir e A12+Stroke □S12 C12 B □T12 C+Stroke U U Z1 F E Z2 G G R □S □T H I φV AS3 AH2 AS2 φD12 YT J AF2 AF2 AG2 AD2 AB2 AE2 AT2 AT2 K W (width across flats) 4-φAP AD2 AG2 AE3 AC7+Stroke AA7+Stroke Code A12 B C C12 D12 E F G H I J K R 40 350 49 93 206 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 2 50 374 57 93 222 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 2 63 383 63 96 222 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 2 80 439 75 108 254 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 2 100 467 75 108 282 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 2 Bore size Code S S12 40 50 62 50 62 75 63 75 94 80 94 112 100 112 138 Bore size T T12 U V W YT Z1 Z2 AA7 AB2 AC7 AD2 AE2 AE3 AF2 AP AS2 AS3 AT2 37 47 12 16 14 37.5 27 53 375 23 351 12 70 60 37 26 41 12 72 66 6 47 56 14 20 17 44 30 56 395 29 371 12 80 70 47 28 48 12 85.5 79 6 56 70 15 20 17 53.5 35 61 414 29 386 14 97 80 56 34 59 14 106 70 84 18 25 21 68.5 35 67 458 41 430 14 114 97 70 34 66 14 122 113 8 84 104 17 30 26 82 36 68 512 32 476 18 138 114 84 43 79 14 148 135 10 AG2 AH2 96.5 8 Dimensions of Double Brake, Axis Right Angled Foot Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDARR Bore size × -2 Stroke pn e A12+Stroke □S12 C12 B □T12 F E U Z1 C+Stroke U Z2 G G R □S □T H I FT3 K FF2 FE2 FD3 FG2 4-φFP2 FG2 FD2 FB2 FF2 FC7+Stroke FE2 FA7+Stroke A12 B C C12 E F G H I J K R S 40 350 49 93 206 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 2 50 50 374 57 93 222 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 2 62 63 383 63 96 222 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 2 75 80 439 75 108 254 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 2 94 100 467 75 108 282 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 2 112 Bore size Code S12 T T12 U V W YT Z1 Z2 FA7 FB2 FC7 FD2 FD3 FE2 FF2 FG2 FH2 FP2 FS2 FS3 FT2 FT3 40 62 37 47 12 16 14 37.5 27 53 326 59 279 22 25 105 83 14 31 12 56 62 5.5 9 50 75 47 56 14 20 17 44 30 56 346 67 295 24 27 117 95 14 38 12 69 75.5 6.5 9 63 94 56 70 15 20 17 53.5 35 61 355 76 292 29 34 147 121 18 47 14 84.5 94 8.5 13 80 112 70 84 18 25 21 68.5 35 67 407 88 336 33 38 168 140 18 57 14 104 113 9.5 14 100 138 84 104 17 30 26 82 36 68 442 89 363 37 42 195 167 18 69 14 125 138 11.5 16 Bore size 93 Code W (width across flats) FS2 FH2 FT2 φV FS3 YT J Dimensions of Double Brake, Rod Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) DDARR Bore size × -3 Stroke ua ir e A12+Stroke C12 B I C+Stroke U U Z1 □T12 Z2 □S12 G G R □S 4‐L H 4-φBP2 □T φD φV BD2 BC2 YT J K Code BA2 W (width across flats) BF2 BE2 A12 BB2 B C C12 D G H I J K 40 350 49 93 206 32 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 50 374 57 93 222 38 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M6×1 Depth 14 63 383 63 96 222 38 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 80 439 75 108 254 44 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 467 75 108 282 50 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 Bore size Code R S 40 2 50 50 2 62 63 2 75 80 2 94 100 2 112 Bore size L S12 T T12 U V W YT Z1 Z2 BA2 BB2 BC2 BD2 BE2 BF2 BP2 62 37 47 12 16 14 37.5 27 53 39 10 65 47 104 86 9 75 47 56 14 20 17 44 30 56 47 10 76 56 116 98 9 94 56 70 15 20 17 53.5 35 61 47 16 95 70 143 119 12 112 70 84 18 25 21 68.5 35 67 59 16 115 84 162 138 12 138 84 104 17 30 26 82 36 68 59 16 138 104 196 168 14 Dimensions of Double Brake, Head Side Flange Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × -5 Stroke pn e DDARR □S12 I C12 B □T12 F E Z1 U U C+Stroke Z2 G G H 4‐L12 □T 4-φBP BC BD φV φD12 YT J K W (width across flats) Code BF BB BG4+Stroke BE B C C12 D12 E F G H I J K 40 49 93 206 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 50 57 93 222 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 63 63 96 222 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 80 75 108 254 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 75 108 282 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Code L12 Depth 14 S12 T T12 U V W YT Z1 Z2 BB BC BD BE BF BG4 BP 40 62 37 47 12 16 14 37.5 27 53 10 52 36 84 70 358 7 50 75 47 56 14 20 17 44 30 56 10 65 47 104 86 382 9 63 94 56 70 15 20 17 53.5 35 61 10 76 56 116 98 391 9 80 112 70 84 18 25 21 68.5 35 67 16 95 70 143 119 453 12 100 138 84 104 17 30 26 82 36 68 16 115 84 162 138 481 12 Bore size 94 Dimensions of Double Brake, Clevis Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × □S12 -7 Stroke ua ir e DDARR C12 B □T12 E I F C+Stroke U U Z1 Z2 G G □S □T H 4‐L12 CF 8 9/f EH φC φV φD12 YT J CD K CT CC W (width across flats) CA4+Stroke Code CT CP +0.7 +0.5 CJ CB4+Stroke PA1 B C C12 D12 E F G H I J K 40 49 93 206 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 50 57 93 222 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 63 63 96 222 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 80 75 108 254 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 75 108 282 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Code S S12 40 50 62 50 62 75 63 75 94 80 94 112 100 112 138 Bore size L12 Depth 14 T T12 U V W YT Z1 Z2 CA4 CB4 CC CD CE CF CJ CP CT PA1 37 47 12 16 14 37.5 27 53 380 367 19 R15 14 R17 13 20 12.5 58 47 56 14 20 17 44 30 56 406 391 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 56 70 15 20 17 53.5 35 61 415 400 19 R17 14 R17 15 20 16.5 66 70 84 18 25 21 68.5 35 67 490 469 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 84 104 17 30 26 82 36 68 518 497 32 R24 20 R30 21 32 17.5 78 Bore size × -7-7C Stroke pn e ●With Supporting Bracket DDARR GA4+Stroke GF GD GE GK2 GI GG GH GJ GT GH GC 4‐φGP GA4 GB GC GD GE GG GH GI GJ 40 433.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 70 45 82.5 11 (Thru hole) 8 50 457.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 76 45 89 11 (Thru hole) 8 63 466.5 66.5 12.5 73 105 80 40 16.5 82.5 45 98.5 11 (Thru hole) 8 80 555.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 107 60 128.5 14 (Thru hole) 12 100 583.5 86.5 20.5 98 135 105 65 16.5 116 60 142 14 (Thru hole) 12 Bore size 95 Code GB GF GK2 GP GT Dimensions of Double Brake, Pivot Mounting Type (Unit mm) Bore size × □S12 -8 Stroke ua ir e DDARR C12 B □T12 E I 4‐L12 Z1 F C+Stroke U U Z2 G G □S □T H DF J φV φD12 YT EH φD 9 DD K W (width across flats) DQ DC DJ DB4+Stroke DA4+Stroke Code B C C12 D12 E F G H I J K 40 49 93 206 38 39 10 31 21 22 8 M14×1.5 M6×1 50 57 93 222 38 47 10 31 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M8×1.25 Depth 14 63 63 96 222 44 47 16 32 29 27 11 M18×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 80 75 108 254 50 59 16 36 37 32 13 M22×1.5 M10×1.5 Depth 15 100 75 108 282 60 59 16 36 37 36 14 M26×1.5 M12×1.75 Depth 15 Bore size Code S S12 40 50 62 50 62 75 63 75 94 80 94 112 100 112 138 Depth 14 T T12 U V W YT Z1 Z2 DA4 DB4 DC DD DE DF DJ DQ 37 47 12 16 14 37.5 27 53 381 367 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 47 56 14 20 17 44 30 56 405 391 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 56 70 15 20 17 53.5 35 61 414 400 19 R17 14 R17 14 0 20 -0.084 70 84 18 25 21 68.5 35 67 490 469 32 R24 20 R25 21 0 32 -0.100 84 104 17 30 26 82 36 68 517 497 32 R24 20 R26 20 0 32 -0.100 pn e Bore size L12 96 Symbol Specifications ●Solid state type Model Item Wiring type Power supply voltage ua ir e Sensor Switches ZC130□ ZC153□ 2-lead wires 3-lead wires ― Load voltage DC4.5∼28V DC10∼28V Load current DC4.5∼28V 4∼50mA Consumption current 100mA MAX. ― Internal voltage dropNote 1 Leakage current 10mA MAX. (at DC24V) 3.5V MAX. 0.5V MAX.(When load current is 50mA) 1mA MAX. (at DC24V) Response time 50μA MAX. (at DC24V) 1ms MAX. Insulation resistance 100MΩ MIN. (at DC500V, between case and lead wire terminals) Dielectric strength AC500V (50/60Hz) for 1 minute (Between case and lead wire terminals) Shock resistanceNote 2 294.2m/s2 {30G} (non-repeating) Note 2 Vibration resistance Environmental protection Operating indicator 2 88.3m/s {9G} (Total amplitude 1.5mm, 10∼55Hz) IP67 (IEC standard), JIS C0920 (watertight type) When ON, a red LED indicator lights up Lead wireNote 3 PVC 0.2SQ×2 leads×R Ambient temperature PVC 0.2SQ×3 leads×R 0∼60˚C Storage temperature range Mass −10∼70˚C 20g (Lead wire length A : 1000mm) pn e Notes: 1. Internal voltage drop varies according to the load current. 2. According to Koganei test standards. 3. Lead wire lengthR: A ; 1000mm, B ; 3000mm ●Reed switch type Item Model CS5T□ CS11T□ Wiring type Load voltage DC5∼28V AC85∼115V (r.m.s.) DC10∼28V Load current DC0.1∼40mA AC2∼25mA DC5∼40mA Internal voltage drop Response time Insulation resistance Dielectric resistance 1ms MAX. AC1500V (50/60Hz) for 1 minute (Between case and lead wire terminals) AC1000V (50/60Hz) for 1 minute (Between case and lead wire terminals) 294.2m/s2 {30G} (non-repeating) 88.3m/s2 {9G} (total amplitude 1.5mm・10∼55Hz) Resonance frequency 2750±250Hz Environmental protection Operating indicator 0mA 100MΩ MIN. (at DC500V, between case and lead wire terminals) Shock resistanceNote 2 Vibration resistanceNote 2 2.1V MAX. (When load current is 40mA)Note 1 0.1V MAX. (When load current is 40mA) Leakage current IP67 (IEC standard), JIS C0920 (watertight type) ― Lead wireNote 3 Electric life cycleNote 2 Ambient temperature Storage temperature range Contact protection Mass Notes: 1. Internal voltage drop varies according to the load current. 2. According to Koganei test standards. 3. Lead wire lengthR: A ; 1000mm, B ; 3000mm 97 2-lead wires When ON, a red LED indicator lights up PVC 0.2SQ×2 leads×R 5×106 cycles MIN. 0∼60˚C −10∼70˚C Required (See the contact protection measures on p. 101) 20g (Lead wire length A : 1000mm) Specifications ●Reed switch type Model Item CS2F CS3F Wiring type CS4F CS5F 2-lead wires Load current Internal voltage drop AC85∼230V(r.m.s.) DC5∼30V DC5∼30V DC3∼30V 2∼200mA 10∼46mANote 1 5∼25mANote 1 0.1∼80mA 0.1V MAX.(When load current is 200mA) 2V MAX.(When load current is 46mA)Note 2 1.8V MAX.(When load current is 25mA)Note 2 0.1V MAX.(When load current is 80mA) ua ir e Load voltage 1mA MAX.(at AC100V) 2mA MAX.(at AC200V) Leakage current Response time 0mA 2ms MAX. Insulation resistance Dielectric strength 1.2ms MAX. 100MΩ MIN. (at DC500V, between case and lead wire terminals) AC500V (50/60Hz) for 1 minute (between case and lead wire terminals) Shock resistanceNote 3 Note 3 Vibration resistance Environmental protection Operating indcator Wiring Electric life cycleNote 3 Ambient temperature Storage temperature range Contact protection Mass 294.2m/s2 {30G} (non-repeating) 2 88.3m/s {9G} (Total amplitude 1.5mm・10∼55Hz) Resonance frequency 5000±400Hz ― When ON, a red neon lamp turn off ― When ON, a red LED indicator lights up With DIN connector (cabtire outer diameterφ6.5 MAX., lead wireφ1.25SQ MAX.) 5×106 cycles MIN. 0∼60˚C −10∼70˚C Not required Required (See the Contact protection on p. 101.) 40g Notes: 1. Ta=37˚C 2. Internal voltage drop varies according to the load current. 3. According to Koganei test standards. Order Code ●Without mounting holder ●With mounting holder ●Order code for mounting holders only ZC130 A ZC130 A − NDDA 40 NDDA: Applicable to other than CS□F Blank : For CS□F Bore size NDDA: Applicable to other than CS□F NDF : Applicable to CS□F only Lead wire length (Applicable to other than CS□F only) A 1000mm B 3000mm pn e Sensor switch model ZC130 2-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V ZC153 3-lead wires Solid state type with indicator lamp DC4.5∼28V CS5T 2-lead wires Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC5∼28V, AC85∼115V CS11T 2-lead wires Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼28V CS2F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp AC85∼230V CS3F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS4F DIN type Reed switch type with indicator lamp DC10∼30V CS5F DIN type Reed switch type without indicator lamp DC3∼30V C1 − NDDA 40 Sensor type C1: Solid state type for ZC1□□ Reed switch type for CS□T DF: Reed switch type for CS□F Bore size 32 For φ32 40 For φ40 50 For φ50 63 For φ63 80 For φ80 100 For φ100 125 For φ125 Sensor Switches and Mounting Holders ●New Dyna cylinder sensor switches come in two types, and two corresponding types of mounting holders are available. ●See the following for details. Solid state type ZC130□□ ZC153□□ Reed switch type CS5T□ CS11T□ DIN connector CS2F CS3F CS4F CS5F 98 Smallest Cylinder Stroke where Sensor Switch Can Be Used mm 2pcs. mounting Sensor switch type When mounted on one tie rod Bore size ZC130 type ZC153 CS5T CS11T When mounted on two tie rods with staggered position When mounted on one surface When mounted on two surfaces Rod side Head side ua ir e On straight line Solid state 1pc. mounting 32 50(85) 10(85) 43(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(61) 40 50(85) 10(85) 43(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(61) 50 50(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(61) 63 53(88) 10(88) 10(88) 10(88) 10(88) 10(58) 80 53(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(64) 100 53(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(64) 125 53(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(64) 32 50(85) 10(85) 43(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(61) 40 50(85) 10(85) 43(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(61) 50 50(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(85) 10(61) 63 53(88) 10(88) 10(88) 10(88) 10(88) 10(58) 80 53(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(64) 100 53(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(64) Reed switch 125 53(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(94) 10(64) type 32 50(88) 28(88) 50(88) 20(88) 15(88) 15(72) 40 50(88) 28(88) 50(88) 20(88) 15(88) 15(72) 50 50(88) 28(88) 50(88) 20(88) 15(88) 15(72) 63 50(91) 28(91) 50(91) 20(91) 15(91) 15(69) CS□F 80 50(96) 28(96) 20(96) 15(96) 15(74) 100 50(94) 28(101) 20(101) 15(101) 15(79) 125 50(94) 28(101) 20(101) 15(101) 15(79) Remark: Figures in parentheses ( ) are for trunnion type. ●When mounted on one tie rod ●When mounted on two tie rods On straight line With staggered position Internal Circuit ZC130□ ● 1pc. mounting When mounted on one surface Rod side When mounted on two surface Head side pn e Display LED Brown (+) ●Trunnion type Display LED ZC153□ Brown (+) Load Switch main circuit DC10∼28V Black DC4.5∼28V Blue (−) (Switch) (External wiring) Zener diode (For surge suppression) CS5T□ Load Switch main circuit Blue (−) (Switch) Diode (For prevention of wrong polarity) (External wiring) Zener diode (For surge suppression) CS11T□ Display LED Brown Brown (+) Blue Blue (−) CS2F CS3F CS4F CS5F (+) (+) (+) (+) (−) (−) (−) (−) Z ● ○ Figure 99 shows terminal numbers of F type connectors. Dimensions of Sensor Switch (Unit mm) ZC130□ ZC153□ Indicator lamp ua ir e (8) □4 (60) (8) (60) 25 25 CS11T□ Indicator lamp (1.5) Maximum sensing location (Cylinder mounting surface) 8 φ3 Model marking surface 3.6 4 3.6 Model marking surface (1.5) (10) Maximum sensing location (Cylinder mounting surface) 10 4 (60) φ3 CS5T□ 4 Maximum sensing location (Cylinder mounting surface) 8.5 φ3 φ3 Maximum sensing location (Cylinder mounting surface) 8.5 4 Model marking surface (1.5) (1.5) □4 Indicator lamp Model marking surface (10) (60) 26 23 Indicator lamp CS5F 13 13 CS2F・CS3F・CS4F 28 24 24 12 Maximum sensing location R10 39 φ6.5 19 7 12 7 12 19 4 4 29 29 pn e 12 □15 φ6.5 □15 14±1 (15) Maximum sensing location R10 39 14±1 (15) 100 Sensor Switch Operating Range, Response Differential and Maximum Sensing Location ●ZC1□□type, CS□T type, CS□F type ua ir e ●Operating range: R The distance the piston travels in one direction while the switch is in the ON position. ●Response differential: C The distance between the point where the piston turns the switch ON, and the point where the switch turns OFF as the piston travels in the opposite direction. R mm Sensor switches type Solid state type ZC130, ZC153 Response differential: C 1.5MAX. Maximum sensing location 8.5 CS11T R 2.5MAX. 7 OFF CS□F 6∼15 2∼6 Operating range:R ON C(Response differential) Reed switch type CS5T 10.5 OFF 16 ON Notes: 1. The grommet type figure is from the surface opposite to the surface of the lead wire side, while the connector type figure is from the connector side's end surface. 2. Figures in the table above are reference values. C(Response differential) Maximum sensing location Mounting Location of Sensor Switch When the sensor switch is mounted in the location shown in the diagram (figures in the table are reference values), the magnet comes to the sensor switch's maximum sensing location at the end of the stroke. ●Grommet type A Bore size 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 ZC130 A 9 9 9 9.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 ZC153 B 5 5 5 5.5 6.5 6.5 10.5 A 10.5 10.5 10.5 11 14 14 16 B 6.5 6.5 6.5 7 8 8 12 A 7 7 7 7.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 B CS5T B Reed switch type mm Code Sensor switch type Solid state type ●Conector type A ●Single rod basic type and non-rotating double rod type CS11T CS□F B 3 3 3 3.5 4.5 4.5 8.5 A 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 7 7 9 B 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 Caution: The reed type sensor switch cannot be mounted on the head side in any direction other than that shown in the diagram. Grommet type enlarged view A ●Standard doulbe rod Solid state type pn e Approx.1.5mm ●Precaution for mounting Bore size 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 ZC130 A 9.5 9 9.5 9.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 ZC153 B 4.5 5 4.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 10.5 A 11 10.5 11 11 14 14 16 B 6 6.5 6 7 8 8 12 A 7.5 7 7.5 7.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 B 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 8.5 A 4 3.5 4 4 7 7 9 B 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 CS5T Reed switch type CS11T Model marking surface Sensing surface For the ZC type sensor switch, the surface opposite to the model marking surface is the sensing surface side. Mount so that the cylinder magnet comes to the sensing surface side. mm Code Sensor switch type CS□F Caution: The reed type sensor switch cannot be mounted on the head side in any direction other than that shown in the diagram. Contact Protection for Reed Type Sensor Switch In order to use the reed type sensor switch in a stabilized condition, the following contact protection should be used. ●When you connect inductive load (electromagnetic relay etc.) ●When capacity serge is generated (When lead wire length exceeds 10m.) Inductive load Sensor switch Surge absorption element For DC……Diode or CR, etc. For AC……CR, etc. Diode: Forward direction requires circuit current or higher, reverse direction requires reverse dielectric strength is 10 times of circuit voltage or more. 101 C: 0.01∼0.1μF R: 1∼4kΩ Choke coil: 1∼5mH C surge suppressor As close as possible Load Dimensions of Sensor Switch ●ZC130・ZC153・CS□T SE SF 10.3 SA 30 SC θ° 4.5 30 SG ua ir e SB SI SD 16 Cylinder tube Tie rod 15 Code θ SE SF SG SI 35 29.8 15.5 6 25.5 1 23.9 38.4 29.8 15.5 6 25.5 10 0.7 34.9 43.4 29.8 15.5 6 25.5 10 0 46.7 48.6 31.8 17.5 8 24.5 18 30.9 0 63.1 55.9 33.3 19 9.5 22.5 22 100 32.2 0 79.8 63.6 33.3 19 9.5 22.5 24.5 125 36.5 ― 99.5 75 37.5 24.8 15.5 27.5 SA SB SC 32 27 5 17 40 26.1 2 50 27.1 63 28.3 80 ●CS□F SA2 SC2 11 (15) 39 12 12 φ6.5 θ° 2 (15) 39 4.5 SE2 SF 24 SG □15 φ6.5 SB SD Cylinder tube 15 Bore size Code SA2 32 41.5 40 33.5 50 40 63 40.5 80 42.5 44 125 49.5 Tie rod θ2 SC2 SD2 SE2 SG SH2 SI 2.5 66.5 43 15.5 6 56.5 25.5 16.5 70 43 15.5 6 56.5 25.5 12 0.5 22 74.5 43 15.5 6 56.5 25.5 10 0 34.5 79.5 45 17.5 6 55.5 24.5 19 ― 51.5 86 46.5 19 9.5 53.5 22.5 23 ― 68 93.5 46.5 19 9.5 53.5 22.5 25 ― 86.5 106.5 52.5 25 50.5 15.5 23.5 5 1.5 SF Set screw 11 2.3 pn e 100 SB 50 SI 20 SD2 SH2 13 13 Bore size Set screw 102 Instructions for Attaching and Removing, and Adjusting of Sensor Switch ZC1□□, CS□T type q w e y CS□F type pn e Requirements for mounting one sensor switch on a cylinder t qSensor Switch r wWasher×1 eScrew×1 rSensor holder×1 tSet screw×2 yTie rod q w y 103 1. ●Align the female thread of sensor holder r to the position of the sub-holder i’s thru hole, and use a screw (long) u to assemble. ●Two thru holes are available for i. Either one can be used. ●The appropriate tightening torque for u is 70 N・cm {about 7kgf・cm}. 2. ●Install the sensor switch q with the model marking surfacee facing upward, and fit on the groove i. ●Align the edges of the body q and indicator lamp (or the cap) to the end plane of i, and assemble. To protect q, always assemble so that the body q does not protrude from the end plane of i. ●The appropriate tightening torque for the screw (short) e is 70N・cm{about 7kgf・cm}. 3. ●Use two set screws t to temporarily fix r in place. ●Fit r that was assembled with q and i onto the tie rod y, and align it to the designated position. Then use a hex bar wrench (width across flats B = 2) to tighten t and fix it in place. Always fix so that the bottom surface of i is in contact with the cylinder tube. ●The appropriate tightening torque for t is 70 N・cm {about 7kgf・cm}. ●While the cylinder comes with four pcs. of y, there is no limit to the number of y that can be used for mounting r. In addition, r can be fitted in any direction. ●Loosening the two t screws allows r to be moved freely along y. ua ir e Requirements for mounting one sensor switch on a cylinder qSensor Switches t r wWasher×1 i eScrew (short)×1 rSensor holder×1 Model marking surface tMounting screw×2 Operating indicator lamp yTie rod uScrew (long)×1 u iSub-holder×1 e 1. ●For the sensor switch q, align the female thread of sensor holder r to any required location of the q’s thru hole (oval), and assemble. ●The appropriate tightening torque for the screw e is 70N・cm{about 7kgf・cm}. 2. ●Use two set screws t to temporarily fix r in place. ●Fit r that was assembled with q onto the tie rod y, and align it to the designated position. Then use a hex bar wrench (width across flats B = 2) to tighten t and fix it in place. Always fix so that the bottom surface of q is in contact with the cylinder tube. ●To detect the head side end of stroke, mount q so that the connector wiring opening faces toward the head cover side, as shown in the diagram at left. ●The appropriate tightening torque for t is 70 N・cm {about 7kgf・cm}. ●While the cylinder comes with four pcs. of y, there is no limit to the number of y that can be used for mounting r. In addition, r can be fitted in any direction. ●Loosening the two t screws allows r to be moved freely along y. Mounting Bracket, Knuckles Order Code ●Mounting bracket ●Y, I type knuckle − ua ir e − Cylinder type NDDA NEW DYNA NDDAR NEW DYNA cylinder with brake Bore size 32 For φ32 40 For φ40 50 For φ50 63 For φ63 80 For φ80 100 For φ100 125 For φ125 Mounting bracket 1 Foot mounting type (one set of two units) 2 Axis right angled foot mounting type (one set of two units) 3 Rod side flange mounting type 5 Head side flange mounting type 7 Clevis mounting type (with pin) 7-7C Clevis mounting type (with supporting brackets) 8 Pivot mounting type 11 Trunnion type 11-11T Trunnion type (with supporting bracket) Cylinder type NDDA NEW DYNA NDDAL NEW DYNA non-rotating cylinder Bore size 32 For φ32 40 For φ40 50 For φ50 63 For φ63 80 For φ80 100 For φ100 125 For φ125 Knuckles Y Y type knuckle I I type knuckle ●For knuckle dimensions, see p. 105. Maximum Potential Manufacturing Stroke with Bellows Specification mm Bellow model / Bore size JT JC JK φ80∼φ125 Maximum manufacturable St×3/4―50 Maximum manufacturable St×4/5―50 Maximum manufacturable St×3/4―50 Maximum manufacturable St×4/5―50 Maximum manufacturable St×2/3―50 Maximum manufacturable St×2/3―50 Maximum manufacturable St×2/3―50 Maximum manufacturable St×2/3―50 pn e JA φ32∼φ63 104 ua ir e Knuckles, Bellows Dimensions of Knuckle (Unit mm) RA ●Y type φ32 ER D D Width across flats ER CD CD CA CW A CW CF EW CP KK CT CF CW EW CW CP CT CA CC A CC Code KK EW A CA CC CD CF CP CT CW D ER 32 23 55 20 φ12H9/f8 φ24 46 32 8 24 R12 16 40 18 46 16 φ12H9/f8 φ25 48 36 9 ― R12.5 18 50 22 46 16 φ12H9/f8 φ25 48 36 9 ― R12.5 18 63 22 50 20 φ16H9/f8 φ32 56 44 11 ― R16 22 80 30 75 25 φ20H9/f8 φ40 68 56 14 ― R20 28 100(other than non-rotating) 34 75 25 φ20H9/f8 φ40 68 56 14 ― R20 28 100(non-rotating) 34 75 25 φ20H9/f8 φ40 68 56 14 ― R20 28 56 100 35 φ20H9/f8 φ40 78 64 16 40 R20 32 Bore size pn e 125 Width across flats φ40∼φ125 RA KK(non-rotating) M10×1.25 ― M14×1.5 M12×1.25 58.5 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 58.5 M18×1.5 M18×1.5 66 M22×1.5 M22×1.5 95 M26×1.5 ― 95 ― M22×1.5 95 ― 120 M27×2 RA 67 RA ● I type ∼φ100 φ32∼ KK(other than non-rotating) +1.5 +0.5 +0.4 +0.1 +0.4 +0.1 +0.4 +0.1 +0.4 +0.1 +0.4 +0.1 +0.4 +0.1 +1.5 +0.5 45° φ 125 RA CF CF ER CD CA J KK A CA CC CD CF D ER EW J KK(other than non-rotating) KK(non-rotating) 32 23 55 20 φ12H9 φ24 24 R12 0 16 -0.1 ― M10×1.25 ― 40 18 46 16 φ12H9 φ25 ― R12.5 18 -0.1 -0.4 ― M14×1.5 M12×1.25 58.5 50 22 46 16 φ12H9 φ25 ― R12.5 18 -0.1 -0.4 ― M18×1.5 M18×1.5 58.5 63 22 50 20 φ16H9 φ32 ― R16 22 -0.1 -0.4 ― M18×1.5 M18×1.5 66 80 30 75 25 φ20H9 φ40 ― R20 28 -0.1 -0.4 ― M22×1.5 M22×1.5 95 100(other than non-rotating) 34 75 25 φ20H9 φ40 ― R20 28 -0.1 -0.4 ― M26×1.5 ― 95 100(non-rotating) 34 75 25 φ20H9 φ40 ― R20 28 -0.1 -0.4 ― ― M22×1.5 95 56 100 32 φ20H9 φ49 ― 20 0 32 -0.1 13 ― 120 Bore size 125 105 A EW D Width across flats EW KK Code CA CD A CC CC ER M27×2 RA 67 Dimensions of Bellows (Unit mm) XX φWW ua ir e H WW Code XX Nylon tarpaulin Chloroprene Cornex Arumix 32 36 36 61 36 40 41 41 61 41 50 47 47 61 47 63 47 47 61 47 80 56 56 61 56 100 61 61 61 61 125 71 71 71 71 Bore sizer Nylon tarpaulin Chloroprene Cornex H Arumix 1/3 stroke+48 1/3 stroke+48 1/2 stroke+48 1/2 stroke+48 1/3 stroke+53 1/3 stroke+53 1/2 stroke+53 1/2 stroke+53 1/4 stroke+58 1/4 stroke+58 2/5 stroke+58 2/5 stroke+58 1/4 stroke+59 1/4 stroke+59 2/5 stroke+59 2/5 stroke+59 19 21 29 29 37 37 50 ●Bellow Specifications Type Specifications Nylon tarpaulin (standard) Chloroprene Cornex Arumix Contents Coating vinyle to nylon cloth Proof tempature ˚C 80 Coating chloroprene to nylon cloth 100 Coating silicon to cornex cloth (no use of asbestos) 200 Coating arumix to asbestos cloth 250 pn e Note: The temperature shown is the bellows own durable temperature, and is not a temperature for cylinder use. 106